650i
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
© 2006 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 012 109
US English II/06, 06 03 500
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 222.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
22 Voice command system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
47 Adjustments
56 Transporting children safely
58 Driving
74 Everything under control
85 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
100 Lamps
104 Climate
110 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
118 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
124 Starting navigation system
125 Destination entry
136 Destination guidance
141 What to do if …
Entertainment
144 On/off and tone
148 Radio
157 CD player and CD changer
Communications
166 Telephoning
179 TeleService, BMW Assist
Mobility
186 Refueling
188 Wheels and tires
194 Under the hood
199 Maintenance
201 Replacing components
206 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
214 Technical data
218 Short commands of voice command
system
222 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to use the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you want to sell your BMW some day,
please remember to hand over the Owner's
Manual as well; it is an important component of
your vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. technol-
ogy, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equip-
ment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes all models and equipment offered by
BMW within the same line.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
*
to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. In iso-
lated cases it is possible that the features
described in this Owner's Manual could differ
from those on your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Notes
6
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-
nance and repair methods. Have corresponding
work on your BMW performed only by your
BMW center or a workshop that works accord-
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri-
ately trained personnel. If this work is not
carried out properly, there is a danger of subse-
quent damage and related safety hazards.<
California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive dam-
age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter-
fere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect
the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See
your BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For U.S. customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you and your dealer or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-
phone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510,
or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Trans-
port Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Convertible: opening and closing rear
window 39
2 Convertible: opening and closing windows
together 39
3 Convertible: opening and closing rear
windows 38
4 Opening and closing front windows 38
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors 52
Automatic parking function 53
6
Turn signals 64
High beams,
headlamp flasher 101
High-beam assistant
*
102
Roadside parking lamps 101
Check Control 79
Computer 75
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
7 Buttons on steering wheel
8 Instrument cluster 12
11 Ignition lock 58
12 Horn: entire surface
15 Releasing hood 194
16 Opening luggage compartment lid 34
Mobile phone
*
166
> Press: accepting and ending
call, starting dialing
*
for
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice
command system
*
22
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling in phone book and in lists
with stored phone numbers
Individually programmable
*
54
Individually programmable 54
9
Windshield wipers 65
Rain sensor 65
10
Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 58
13
Steering wheel heater
*
54
Steering wheel adjustment 53
14
Cruise control 66
Active cruise control
*
67
17
Head-Up Display
*
95
BMW Night Vision
*
97
18
Parking lamps 100
Low beams 100
Automatic headlamp control 100
Adaptive Head Light
*
101
High-beam assistant
*
102
19
Instrument lighting 103
Front fog lamps 103
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Indicator lamps for turn signals
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Displays for active cruise control
*
70
5 Tachometer 74
6 Engine oil thermometer 75
7 Display for
> Time/date 74
> Outside temperature 74
> Indicator and warning lamps 79
> Speed for cruise control 67
> Desired speed for active cruise
control
*
70
8 Displays for
> Odometer and trip odometer 74
> Computer 75
> Date and remaining distance to be
driven for service requirements 77
> Automatic transmission
with Steptronic
*
62
> SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission
*
61
> Dynamic Driving Control 64
> High-beam assistant
*
102
> Check Control message present 79
9 Fuel gauge 75
10 Resetting trip odometer 74
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up both in
the display area 1 and in the display 2 in various
combinations and colors.
When the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on, some lamps are checked for
proper operation and light up briefly in the pro-
cess.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-
trol Display explain the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps displayed.
You can consult Check Control for additional
information, e.g. regarding the cause of a mal-
function or the appropriate actions to take, refer
to page 79.
In cases of corresponding urgency, this infor-
mation is immediately displayed when the
associated lamps light up.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps in the display
area 1 indicate that certain functions are active:
Handbrake set 60
Handbrake for Canadian models
Front fog lamps 103
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87
High beams/headlamp flasher 101
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is controlling the drive
and braking forces to maintain vehicle
stability 87
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Coupe: glass sunroof, electric with raise
function
*
40
2 Microphone for handsfree mode for
telephone
*
and voice command system
*
22
Convertible: microphone on steering
column
3 Reading lamps 103
4 Interior lamps 103
5 Coupe: initiating
an emergency call 206
6 Indicator lamp
for front passenger
airbags 93
7 Convertible: initiating emergency
call
*
206
8 Control Display 16
9 Hazard warning flashers
10 Central locking system 32
11 Automatic climate control 104
12 Changing
> radio station 149
> track 144
13 Ejecting
> navigation DVD
*
124
> audio CD 144
14 Player for navigation DVD in Professional
*
navigation system 124
15 Drive for audio CDs 144
16 Entertainment sound output on/off
and adjusting volume 145
18 Bracket for cup holder 113
19 Controller 16
Turn, press or move horizontally in four
directions
20 Activating voice command system
*
22
21 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
22 Dynamic Driving Control 64
Temperature setting,
left/right 104
Automatic air distribution and
volume 105
Cooling function 106
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 107
Recirculated-air mode 107
Maximum cooling 107
Residual heat mode 107
Switching off automatic climate
control 107
Air volume 106
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 106
Rear window defroster 104
17
Heated seats 52
PDC Park Distance Control
*
85
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87
Convertible: opening the convert-
ible top 42
Convertible: closing the convertible
top 42
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of
switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of individual functions is
described in connection with the relevant
equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button
Opening the start menu
3 Controller
You can use the controller to select menu
items and change settings by:
> moving in four directions, arrows 4
> turning, arrow 5
> pressing, arrow 6
To avoid becoming distracted and unnec-
essarily endangering both your own vehi-
cle's occupants and other road users, never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Menu overview
Communication
> Telephone
*
> BMW Assist
*
or TeleService
*
Navigation or onboard information
> Navigation system
*
> Onboard info, e.g. for displaying of the
average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer
*
Climate
> Air distribution
> Automatic program
> Parked car ventilation
menu
> Switching off the Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of service requirements and dates
for statutory emission and vehicle inspec-
tions
> Settings for the telephone
Basic operation
From radio readiness, refer to page 58, the fol-
lowing message is shown on the Control Dis-
play:
To clear the message:
Press the controller.
This displays the start menu.
On vehicles with a single drive, the message
automatically disappears after approx. 10 sec-
onds.
Start menu
You can call up all the functions of iDrive using
five menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Opening menu items of start menu
From the start menu, you can call up the four
menu items Communication, Navigation, Enter-
tainment, and Climate by moving the controller
left, right, forward, or back.
You can open the menu by pressing the con-
troller.
Comfort opening of menu items
Convenience opening offers you the option of:
> Opening a menu item of the start menu in
the view last selected
> Direct switching between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without pressing the button
To do so, move the controller in the corre-
sponding direction and hold it for longer than
approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is divided into fields. The cur-
rently selected field appears brighter.
2 A symbol indicates the last selected menu
item of the start menu:
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 Arrows indicate the possibility of accessing
other menu items that are not currently vis-
ible.
3 Settings are displayed graphically or
numerically.
Communication
Navigation or onboard info
Entertainment
Climate
menu
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating principle at a glance
Basic operation via iDrive is described in this
view.
You can view the individual steps under Set-
tings on Control Display, Setting time, refer to
page 82.
1 Selecting menu item:
> Turn controller; marking moves
> Menu items shown in white can be
selected by marking
2 Activating a menu item:
> Press controller
> New menu items are displayed or func-
tion is carried out
3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1
4 Changing between fields:
> Briefly move controller left, right, forward
or back
> Release controller
> Active field appears lighter
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirmation by changing field
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD
> Telephone
*
in "Communication":
Name of linked mobile phone, network
search or no network
> "BMW Assist"
*
:
Existing voice connection with a service
from BMW Assist
2 Entertainment sound output off
3 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"
*
> Roaming active
4 Telephoning
*
possible if the mobile
phone is logged-on in the vehicle
Mobile phone network reception
strength, display dependent on mobile
phone
5 Time
Other displays:
When Check Control information appears or
entries are made via the voice command sys-
tem
*
, the status information is temporarily hid-
den.
Assistance window*
Additional information can be displayed in the
assistance window:
> the computer or the trip computer
> the arrow or map view with a navigation
system
*
> the current position
Selecting displays
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching assistance window on/off
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.
To switch on, change to the assistance window
and press the controller.
Switching Control Display on/
off
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control-
ler.
To switch on, press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Voice command system
22
Voice command system
The concept
The voice command system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out ever removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your
spoken commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system includes a special
microphone.
The microphone is located:
> Near the interior rearview mirror in the
Coupe, refer to page 14
> On the steering column in the Convertible
Prerequisite
In order to enable identification of the com-
mands to be spoken, use iDrive to set the lan-
guage for the voice command system. Setting
iDrive language, refer to page 84.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the button.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
command system can respond to com-
mands.
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol is shown on the Control Display
when you can input additional commands.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates the responses of the voice
command system.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
If no other commands are possible, then oper-
ate the equipment using iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice input
Press the button on the steering wheel or in
the center console
or
Commands
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands related to the selected menu
item on the Control Display.
To have the system list the possible com-
mands:
For example, if you have selected "CD", the
system will read aloud the possible commands
for operating the CD player and the CD
changer
*
.
Opening help
Using alternative commands
There are often several commands for running
a function, e.g.:
Running functions directly with short
commands
You can use short commands to carry out cer-
tain functions directly, regardless of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 218.
Opening start menu
An example: selecting a track
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
5. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
{Cancel}
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}
4. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD player switched on}}
6. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Voice command system
24
Notes
The mobile phone can also be operated
with voice commands, refer to
page 174.<
For voice commands, bear the following in
mind:
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphasis and pauses. This also applies to
spelling when entering the destination.
> Always say the commands in the language
of voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
usual pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sun-
roof
*
or convertible top closed to prevent
interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid background noises in the vehicle
while speaking.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
1 Remote control with integrated key
2 Spare key
3 Adapter for spare key, in glove compart-
ment
Remote control with integrated key
Each remote control contains a battery which is
automatically charged in the ignition lock while
driving. Drive a longer distance with each
remote control at least twice a year to keep the
battery charged. For comfort access
*
, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 38.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-
tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 29.
Information on the required maintenance is also
stored in the remote control, refer to Service
data in remote control, page 199.
Integrated key
Press the button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Hotel function, refer to page 33
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 34.
New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW center.
Spare key
Store the spare key in a safe place such as your
wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key of the remote
control fit the same locks.
Adapter for spare key
The adapter is required so that the vehicle can
be started with the spare key or radio readiness
can be switched on.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Remove the adapter from the holder in the
glove compartment and slide the spare key into
the adapter before use.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Per-
sonal Profile ensures that most of these set-
tings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls.
Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> When unlocking with the remote control,
either unlock only the driver's door or
unlock the entire vehicle, refer to page 30
> Locking the vehicle after a short time or
after starting to drive, refer to page 33
> Assigning the programmable buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 54
> Settings for the display on the Control Dis-
play:
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 83
> Units of measure for consumption,
route/distances, temperature and pres-
sure, refer to page 84
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 84
> 12h/24h clock mode, refer to page 83
> Date format, refer to page 83
> Showing optical warning for PDC Park Dis-
tance Control
*
, refer to page 85
> Selection and brightness of the display for
the Head-Up Display
*
, refer to page 96
> Display settings of BMW Night Vision
*
,
refer to page 98
> Air distribution, temperature in the upper
body region, and intensity for the automatic
climate control, refer to page 105
> Adjusting the voice instructions for the des-
tination guidance of the navigation sys-
tem
*
, refer to page 139
The most recent settings for the following are
also called up during unlocking:
> Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steering-
wheel position, refer to page 49
> Audio sources, setting volume and tone,
refer to page 145
> The display of the stored stations for the
radio, refer to page 148
> The volume setting for the telephone, refer
to page 170
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for opera-
tion whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system either locks or unlocks all of the fol-
lowing:
> Doors
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
> Compartment in the front center console
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> via the remote control
> via the door lock
> with comfort access
*
via the door handles
These actions operate the anti-theft system at
the same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-
dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy
lamps
*
are also switched on and off with the
remote control. The alarm system
is armed/dis-
armed at the same time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system
on page 35.
Operating from inside
Via the central locking button, refer to page 32.
The fuel filler door
and the compartment in the
front center console are not locked, refer to
page 32.
In the event of a serious accident, the central
locking system unlocks automatically. The haz-
ard warning flashers and interior lamps are also
switched on.
Opening and closing:
from outside
Using remote control
Because any persons or animals left unat-
tended in a parked vehicle could lock the
doors from the inside, you should always keep
the remote control with you when you leave the
vehicle; this precaution ensures that you will
remain able to unlock the vehicle from the out-
side at all times.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
Use it to unlock the vehicle according to current
settings.
You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The
setting is stored for the remote control currently
in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
*
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
8. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Convenience opening mode
Press the button longer:
> Coupe: the windows are opened, the glass
sunroof
*
is raised and the sliding visor
slides back.
> Convertible: the windows and the convert-
ible top are opened.
Watch the convertible top during the
opening process to be sure that no
one is injured. Releasing the button stops
the operation.<
Locking doors
Press the button.
Switching on interior lamps
With vehicle locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Panic mode*
You can also trigger the alarm system in case of
danger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off alarm: press any button.
Opening luggage compartment lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens, regard-
less of whether it was previously locked or
unlocked.
A previously locked luggage compart-
ment lid is also locked again after closing.
Coupe: during opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure there is
sufficient clearance.<
Setting confirmation signals
You can vary or also deactivate the confirmation
signals for locking or unlocking.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-
troller.
6. Select the desired signal.
7. Press the controller.
The signal is activated.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate owing to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock
using a key.
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 28.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
> This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Using door lock
When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.
2. A second turn of the key unlocks the pas-
senger door and luggage compartment lid.
Convenience operation
You can use the door lock to operate the win-
dows and the glass sunroof
*
in the Coupe or to
operate the windows and the top in the Con-
vertible.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Keep a close eye on the closing process
and also on the opening process of the
convertible top to be sure that no one is injured.
Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
Opening and closing:
from inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti-
vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door
remains unlocked.
You can also set the situations in which the
vehicle is locked.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
6. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after a short time
when no door has been opened.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle as soon as you
start to drive.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock both doors at the same time
with the button for the central locking sys-
tem and then pull the door handle above the
armrest or
> pull the door handle for each door twice: the
first pull unlocks the door, and the second
one opens it.
Locking doors
> Use the central locking button to lock both
of the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Because any persons or animals left unat-
tended in a parked vehicle could lock the
doors from the inside, you should always keep
the remote control with you when you leave the
vehicle; this precaution ensures that you will
remain able to unlock the vehicle from the out-
side at all times.<
Hotel function
The hotel function locks the compartment in
the front center console and the luggage com-
partment lid separately and disconnects them
from the central locking system. If you hand
over the remote control without the integrated
key, refer to page 28, e.g. at a hotel, then this
prevents access to the luggage compartment
and to the compartment in the front center con-
sole.
Turn the key to the right, refer to illustration,
until the key slot points in the direction of travel
and then remove:
The hotel function is activated after subsequent
locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The system
locks the luggage compartment lid and the
compartment in the front center console and
disconnects them from the central locking sys-
tem.
Manual release
In order to manually unlock the compartment in
the front center console in the event of an elec-
trical malfunction, turn the key all the way to the
right until it reaches the stop.
If unlocking was manual, return the lock to
the home position, i.e. all the way back to
the left, before reactivating the hotel function.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely press it closed gen-
tly. The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; as otherwise injuries may
result.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Luggage compartment lid
During opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure
there is sufficient clearance.<
Opening from inside
Press the button:
The luggage compartment lid opens, provided
that it is not locked or the hotel function is not
activated, refer to the above section.
Opening from outside
Press the upper half of the BMW emblem or
press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid
opens.
Convertible: if the convertible top is not
completely open or closed, then the lug-
gage compartment lid cannot be opened, refer
to page 42.<
Manual release
The luggage compartment lid lock is located
under the BMW emblem. All keys, refer to
page 28, fit the luggage-compartment lid lock.
Turn the key toward the right up to the stop: the
luggage compartment lid opens.
If you use the lock to open the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm will be triggered. To prevent
this, you should deactivate the alarm before-
hand.
If the alarm has been triggered accidentally,
switch off the alarm, refer to page 35.<
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear; other-
wise, injuries may result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Emergency release
Pull lever in luggage compartment. The lug-
gage compartment lid is unlocked.
Luggage compartment
There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners
of the luggage compartment for securing lug-
gage nets
*
or securing straps to fix luggage in
position.
Also refer to Securing cargo, page 121.
Convertible: increasing luggage
compartment capacity
With the convertible top closed, you can
enlarge the luggage compartment capacity.
To do so, unfold the handle and press it down-
ward in the direction of travel, refer to arrow.
This moves the convertible top compartment
floor into the raised position.
Before opening the convertible top, carry out
this procedure in reverse order.
The convertible top cannot be opened if
the convertible top compartment floor is
in the raised position.<
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> To the opening of a door, the hood, or the
luggage compartment lid
> To movements in the vehicle interior: inte-
rior motion sensor, refer to page 36
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
> by triggering an acoustic alarm
> by switching on
the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid,
even with the system armed, by using the
button of the remote control, refer to page 31.
When the luggage compartment lid is closed,
it is once again locked and monitored.
Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 30, or
> insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp below the interior rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to mon-
itor the remaining areas, and the indicator
lamp flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. However, the interior motion
sensor is not activated.
> After the vehicle is unlocked, the indicator
lamp goes out: no manipulation or
attempted intrusions have been detected in
the period since the system was armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: an attempted entry has
been detected in the period since the sys-
tem was armed.
Tilt alarm sensor
Monitors the inclination of the vehicle. The
alarm system reacts, for example, if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe:
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof
*
must be completely closed.
Convertible:
Monitors the interior up to the height of the seat
cushions. This means that the alarm system,
including the interior motion sensor, is armed
even if the convertible top is open. Falling
objects, e.g. leaves, can trigger false alarms,
refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time.
This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the
following situations:
> In stacking garages
> When transporting on car-carrying trains
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.
Comfort access*
Comfort access enables you to access your
vehicle without having to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the
remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
related remote control in the immediate vicinity
or in the interior.
Comfort access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort locking with Coupe
> Opening luggage compartment lid
separately
> Starting engine
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked if the vehicle detects that
the remote control you are carrying is out-
side the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previ-
ously with the comfort access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Before doing
so, please familiarize yourself with the informa-
tion on opening and closing, starting on
page 28.
The special features when using comfort
access are described below.
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows, the glass sunroof
or the convertible top, the system is checking
whether a remote control is located in the vehi-
cle. Please repeat opening or closing if neces-
sary.<
Unlocking
Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control is detected in the interior
after unlocking, the electric steering-wheel lock
disengages, refer to page 58.
Locking doors
> For the driver's door, touch the area high-
lighted in the picture, arrow 2, with your fin-
ger for approx. 1 second.
> For the passenger's door, touch the area
highlighted in the picture, arrow 3, with your
finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but-
ton.
Please make sure that the ignition and all
current consumers are switched off
before locking to save the battery.<
Coupe: comfort locking
Hold a finger or the back of the hand on the sur-
face, arrow 2 or 3.
The windows, the glass sunroof
*
and the slid-
ing visor are closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle stops the closing
process immediately.<
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
From radio readiness switched on, the windows
can be opened and closed, and with the vehicle
stopped the convertible top, when a remote
control is located in the interior of the vehicle.
Opening luggage compartment lid
separately
Press the upper half of the BMW emblem.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the
luggage compartment is detected inside
the locked vehicle after the luggage compart-
ment lid has been closed, then the luggage
compartment lid opens again. The hazard warn-
ing flashers flash and a signal
*
sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you
switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 58.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
or clutch pedal, as otherwise the engine
will start immediately.<
Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion if a remote control is located on the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 58.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
If you take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a
warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display. As long as no
remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is
only possible to restart the engine within
approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.
Switching off engine with automatic
transmission
The engine can only be switched off in the
selector lever position P, refer to page 60.
To switch off the engine in the selector lever
position N, the remote control must be inserted
in the ignition lock.
Before driving into a car wash with
automatic transmission
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Place selector lever in position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction
The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. If this occurs, then
open or close the vehicle with the buttons on
the remote control or with a key. To start the
engine after this, insert the remote control in the
ignition lock.
Replacing battery
The remote control for comfort access contains
a battery which must be replaced occasionally.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con-
trol, refer to page 28.
2. Remove cover.
3. Insert new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure them-
selves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open for as long
as you hold down the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
For information on window operation with com-
fort access, also refer to page 37.
To close the side windows while the vehi-
cle is being driven, always close the rear
windows first or all four windows simulta-
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
neously; otherwise, the windows cannot close
tightly at higher speeds.<
Individually
> Press the switch down to the resistance
point:
The window continues to open for as long
as you hold down the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot
be closed automatically.
Together
1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in the button 1 and the switch 2
light up for approx. 10 seconds.
2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
All windows, including the rear window,
continue to open as long as you press
the switch.
You can close the windows in the same
manner by pulling the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the opening
movement.
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.
Rear window
1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in the button 1 and the switch 2
light up for approx. 10 seconds.
2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
The rear window continues to open for
as long as you hold down the switch.
You can close the rear window in the
same manner by pulling the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The rear window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the
opening movement.
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.
The rear window opens and closes auto-
matically when you open or close the con-
vertible top.<
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the doors has been opened.
For information on using the convenience oper-
ation mode at the door lock or with the remote
control, refer to page 31 or 32.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
Coupe: for information on comfort closing with
comfort access, refer to page 37.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will imme-
diately stop moving the window prior to lower-
ing it slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Pulling the switch beyond the resistance point
and holding it limits the response of the pinch
protection system. In this case, the window will
respond to forces beyond a defined threshold
by opening only slightly.
If you pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there,
the pinch protection system will be deactivated.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, as otherwise the
pinch protection system will be impaired.
Convertible: the rear side windows and rear
window are not equipped with a pinch protec-
tion system. Therefore, watch the rear side win-
dows and the rear window during closing, as
otherwise injuries can occur.<
Coupe:
Glass sunroof, electric with
raise function*
The glass sunroof and sliding visor are opera-
tional whenever the ignition is switched on.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
Raising and closing glass sunroof
> Briefly press the switch:
The sunroof opens and the sliding visor
moves back approx. 2 in/5 cm
or
press the switch twice past the resistance
point toward the rear:
The sunroof opens and the sliding visor
moves completely back.
> To close, briefly press the switch or push it
twice beyond the resistance point toward
the front:
The sunroof and sliding visor close.
Opening and closing sliding visor
> Push the switch up to the resistance point in
the desired direction:
The sliding visor continues to move for as
long as you hold the switch.
> Push the switch beyond the resistance
point in the desired direction:
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Briefly press the switch again in any direc-
tion to stop the movement.
For information on using the convenience oper-
ation mode at the door lock or with the remote
control, refer to page 31 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 37.
Pinch protection system
If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when
closing, the closing action is interrupted and the
glass sunroof opens.
If the sliding visor encounters resistance when
closing within the last approx. 8 in/20 cm, the
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
closing action is interrupted and the sliding
visor opens again slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system, you
should inspect the sunroof's travel range
prior to closing it, as the safety feature might fail
to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.
Pressing the switch beyond the resistance
point and holding it deactivates the pinch pro-
tection system.<
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After an interruption in the power supply the
glass sunroof may not move. The system has to
be initialized. Should this occur, please have the
sunroof initialized at your BMW center.
Moving manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the panorama glass sunroof and the slid-
ing visor manually.
Glass sunroof
1. Remove cover on headliner in front of rear
window. To do so, lift slightly, arrows 1.
Grasp behind the cover, arrows 2 and pull
firmly downward.
2. Insert Allen wrench from onboard tool kit,
refer to page 201, into the opening pro-
vided.
3. Use the Allen wrench to move the glass
sunroof in the desired direction.
Sliding visor
1. Fold the cover downward, if necessary
using the screwdriver from the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 201.
2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the
onboard tool kit into the opening provided.
3. Use the Allen wrench to move the sliding
visor in the desired direction.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
Convertible: top
The fully automatic convertible top combines
secure weather protection with simple and con-
venient operation.
Here are a few tips for getting the maximum
pleasure from your Convertible:
> It is advisable to close the convertible top
when the vehicle is parked. The closed con-
vertible top not only protects the passenger
compartment from unforeseen weather
damage, it also provides a certain amount of
protection from theft. Nonetheless, even if
the convertible top is closed, only keep
valuables in the locked luggage compart-
ment.
> Do not attach luggage rack systems to the
convertible top.
In order to avoid damage, do not move the
convertible top at temperatures below
+147/–106.
Do not leave the convertible top in its storage
compartment for longer than one day when wet;
otherwise, damage from moisture can occur.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top;
otherwise, if the top were to be operated, these
objects could fall off and lead to damage or
injury.
Never move the convertible top when the roll-
over protection system is raised.
Driving without having completed the opening
or closing action can lead to damage or injury.
Do not place hands in the top mechanism dur-
ing the opening and closing action. Keep chil-
dren away from the travel path of the convert-
ible top.
For safety reasons, do not move the convertible
top unless the vehicle is stationary.<
If you have initiated top movement with
the vehicle at a stop and then start to
drive, e.g. at a traffic light, you can continue the
initiated operation up to a speed of 20 mph/
30 km/h:
To do so, press and hold the corresponding
button.<
Partial vacuums that occur at higher
speeds in the passenger compartment
can make the convertible top flap. Use the auto-
matic climate control to increase the air supply
so that a partial vacuum in the vehicle does not
occur.<
Prior to opening and closing
> Read the safety precautions above carefully
and comply with them fully.
> Make sure that the convertible top com-
partment floor in the luggage compartment
is in the lowered position, refer to page 35;
otherwise, the convertible top cannot be
opened.
> Make sure that the luggage compartment
lid is closed.
Opening and closing
For information on top operation with comfort
access, also refer to page 37.
Ignition key in radio ready position or higher,
refer to page 58, with the vehicle stationary:
To avoid putting excessive strain on the
battery, only move the convertible top
when the engine is running if possible.
Before closing the convertible top, remove for-
eign objects from the windshield frame, as
these might inhibit closing of the convertible
top.<
1 Closing
2 LED
3 Opening
When the button for operating the con-
vertible top is pressed, the side windows
move downward slightly and the rear window is
lowered completely.
If you hold down the button after the LED 2
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
goes out, then the windows travel upward
again.
If the convertible top is not completely open or
closed, then the luggage compartment lid can-
not be opened.<
LED
In the following situations, in addition to the
LED, a message is displayed on the Control
Display and an acoustic signal may sound:
> During convertible top operation, the LED
lights up green. It goes out as soon as the
opening or closing action is finished.
> If the LED flashes red when you release the
button, the opening or closing action has
not yet finished.
> If the LED lights up red when the button is
pressed, either the floor of the convertible
top storage compartment in the luggage
compartment is in the raised position or a
malfunction has occurred. The convertible
top cannot be moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted immediately if the button for top
operation is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction by pressing
the appropriate button.
If the opening or closing action is interrupted for
a longer period, the convertible top remains in
that position for approx. 15 minutes before it
slowly moves to a stable position.
A convertible top which is not completely
opened or closed presents a danger.
Do not interrupt and continue the closing action
several times in succession; otherwise, the top
mechanism can be damaged.<
If the convertible top is not completely
open or closed, then the luggage com-
partment lid cannot be opened.<
Convenience operation with remote
control and via door lock
Refer to pages 31 and 32.
Manual closing
Only close the convertible top manually if
absolutely necessary; never open it man-
ually. The convertible top compartment lid can-
not be locked in the event of an electrical mal-
function and would open while the vehicle is
being driven.
Improper handling can lead to damage.<
Before closing
1. Open luggage compartment lid.
2. Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver
from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 201.
3. Pry out the two buttons in the luggage com-
partment with the screwdriver and then pull
firmly. This unlocks the convertible top
compartment lid.
4. Close luggage compartment lid.
During manual convertible top opera-
tion, the luggage compartment lid
cannot be opened.<
5. Completely open the side windows and the
rear window.
If the rear window cannot be opened using
the switch, it must be lowered manually.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
44
Opening rear window manually
1. Pry out the cover between the rear head
restraints. To do so, place the screwdriver
as close as possible to the locking ele-
ments, as shown in the illustration.
2. Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible
into the opening and turn firmly in the direc-
tion indicated by the arrow until the rear
window is completely open.
Closing
Perform the following work steps with the
assistance of a second person and with
the doors open, as otherwise injury and damage
to the convertible top can occur.<
1. Push the cover 1 on the left and right of the
side panel forward. Reach into the resulting
openings and raise the convertible top
compartment lid 2 as far as it will go.
2. Grasp the top with both hands at the left and
right side frame, arrow 3.
Only lift out the top by the side frame,
as otherwise the top may be dam-
aged.<
3. Together with the other person, pull the two
sides of the convertible top out simulta-
neously and pivot forward. When doing so,
keep the convertible top compartment lid
open, arrow 4, e.g. with your shoulder.
Do not carry out the next operation,
raising top ends, until the top has
been swung forward, as otherwise damage
can occur.<
4. Raise the two convertible top ends as far as
possible, arrow 5, and close the convertible
top compartment lid, arrow 6.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Fold the top ends down onto the convert-
ible top compartment lid.
6. From the interior, take out the cover in the
center of the front top frame; use a screw-
driver if necessary.
7. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening
provided.
8. From the outside, both persons pull the
front frame of the convertible top down-
ward, as simultaneously as possible on the
two sides.
9. Turn the Allen wrench in the direction of the
arrow until the front convertible top frame is
locked to the windshield frame.
The rear convertible top ends are automati-
cally pressed onto the convertible top com-
partment lid and close tightly with tension.
10. If necessary, close the rear window again
manually in the same way as above.
Wind deflector*
The wind deflector keeps the air movement in
the passenger compartment to a minimum
when the convertible top is open, thus enabling
pleasant driving even at higher speeds.
The wind deflector is stowed in a protective
sleeve in the luggage compartment. Short
instructions for use are also provided on the
protective sleeve.
Before installing
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive sleeve and fold it open, refer to
arrows 1.
2. Press the upper and lower section together
until the locking device engages, refer to
arrow 2.
3. Push the securing pin 3 out until it engages.
4. Unfold the rear mounts 4.
Installing
1. Insert the securing pin 1 of the wind deflec-
tor into the appropriate opening on the right
side of the vehicle.
2. Guide the rear mounts 2 into the recepta-
cles provided.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Opening and closing
46
3. Push the securing pin 3 on the left side into
the appropriate opening until it snaps into
place.
4. Fold up the upper half 4 of the wind deflec-
tor.
With wind deflector fitted: do not incline
the front seat backrests too far backward
if the seat is to be moved back to the end posi-
tion. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be dam-
aged.<
Removing
The same as installing, but in reverse order.
Folding up
1. Push the handle of the securing pin on the
wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle
all the way back and release the locking
mechanism.
2. Fold in the upper and lower section.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seat position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to fol-
low the instructions contained in the following
section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 56.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
knee and front airbags are triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju-
ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 92.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise, there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 50.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats that are each
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the
neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the
safety belt without twisting, snugly across the
lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos-
sible. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips
in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the
abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents
the belt from fitting properly and pull the shoul-
der belt upward periodically to readjust the ten-
sion across your lap in order to avoid a reduc-
tion in the retention effect of the safety belt.<
Safety belts refer to page 51.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
operating the vehicle. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger side as well, do not tilt
the backrest too far toward the rear. Failure to
observe this precaution can prevent the belt
from providing effective protection against
injury, as the passenger could slide under the
belt in an accident.<
Also follow the instructions regarding damage
to the safety belt on page 52.
Convertible: with the wind deflector fitted,
do not incline the front seat backrests too
far backward if the seat is to be moved back to
the end position. Otherwise, the wind deflector
will be damaged.<
Seat adjustment
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 47.<
1 Inclination
2 Longitudinal direction
3 Height
4 Backrest
5 Convertible: head restraints, refer to
page 50
With the sports seat
*
, you can also adjust the
thigh support manually:
Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the
longitudinal direction.
Adjusting lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contours of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear of switch.
> Move curvature up or down:
Press top or bottom of switch.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory
You can store and select three different adjust-
ment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mir-
rors and steering wheel.
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 58.
2. Adjust the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering-wheel positions.
3. Press the button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3:
The LED goes out.
Requesting
Do not request a position from the mem-
ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a
risk of accident from unexpected movement of
the seat or steering wheel.<
Convenience mode
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness, refer to page 58.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1,
2 or 3.
The system immediately cancels the adjust-
ment procedure when you briefly press one of
the seat adjustment switches or one of the
memory buttons.
The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel
is immediately interrupted if you briefly press
the switch for the steering wheel adjustment in
any direction, refer to page 53.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch ignition
on or off, refer to page 58.
2. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.
Activating with remote control
The last positions of the driver's seat, external
rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored
for the remote key currently in use.
You can choose when the position is requested:
> Request when unlocking vehicle
> Request when opening driver's door
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
7. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".
8. Press the controller.
To cancel the request:
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. If you fail to do
so, any persons or objects behind the seat
could be injured or damaged by a rearward
movement of the seat.<
Front head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise, there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Coupe
Adjusting height
> To raise: pull the head restraint upward.
> To lower: slide the head restraint down-
ward.
To reach the lowest position, press the
button, refer to arrow 1.<
Adjusting tilt angle
Swivel the head restraints.
Removal
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the
head restraint.
Only remove head restraint when no pas-
senger is seated in the respective seat, as
otherwise you will be in violation of the law.
Reinstall head restraint before passengers use
the respective seat.<
Installation
Insert head restraint into the sockets and
adjust.
Convertible
Adjusting height
> To raise: move the switch upward.
> To lower: move the switch downward.
Adjusting tilt angle
Swivel the head restraints.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Getting in back
Before starting to drive, fold backrests
back, otherwise there is the danger of
accident due to an unexpected movement of
the seat.<
Coupe: releasing backrest
Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest for-
ward.
The lever is designed so that the safety belt can
be hooked onto it. This enables you to fasten
the safety belt more conveniently.
Convertible: releasing backrest
The belt system integrated in the seat makes it
easier to get in back.
1. Pull lever 1 up and fold the backrest for-
ward.
2. Press and hold button 2 until the seat has
moved into the desired position.
3. After passengers have entered the rear, fold
the backrest back and lock it in place.
4. Press and hold button 3 until the seat has
moved back into its previous position. If you
release button 3 before this, the seat stops
in its current position.
You can lock the backrest in place when it
is folded forward. This is useful, for exam-
ple, when you get into the vehicle while it is
parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audi-
bly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not
need to use lever 1 to release it.<
Lock backrest warning lamp:
Lights up when the backrest is not
locked. At the same time, a message is
shown on the Control Display.
Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 47.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Adjustments
52
Releasing
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be in
the correct position for adults of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 48.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat*
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig-
nal sounds. At the same time, an addi-
tional message appears on the Control
Display. Please check whether safety belts are
being worn correctly.
The safety belt memory is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the event of loads caused by accidents
or other damage: replace the belt system
including the safety belt tensioner and any child
restraint systems, and have the belt anchor
points checked. Have this work carried out only
by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with
appropriately trained personnel. Otherwise cor-
rect operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<
Heated seats
The temperature setting advances one step in
its control sequence each time you press the
button. The maximum temperature is supplied
when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off:
Press the button longer.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased acci-
dent risk.<
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the
automatic parking function
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-
ror and steering wheel memory on page 49.
Adjusting manually
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their mirror
glass.
Folding exterior mirrors in and out
To prevent the exterior mirrors from being
damaged due to the width of the vehicle,
always fold them in by hand before entering an
automatic car wash.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic functions
> Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated
when the motor is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> When the vehicle is moving forward, the
interior and exterior mirrors dim as a func-
tion of the incoming light.
The interior mirror is provided with two photo-
cells to control its automatic dimming function.
One is integrated into the mirror glass, refer to
arrow, while the other is located at a position
slightly offset from this on the back of the mirror
housing.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Also
do not attach stickers to the windshield in front
of the mirror.
Tilting down passenger-side mirror –
automatic parking function
Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever posi-
tion R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger's side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-
ing, etc.
Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-
dent as the result of unexpected movement.<
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to
Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory,
page 49.
Electric steering wheel lock
The steering wheel locks or unlocks automati-
cally when the remote control is removed or
inserted, refer to page 58.
Easy entry/exit
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the steering wheel temporarily moves into the
uppermost position.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Adjustments
54
Steering wheel heater*
Press the button with the ignition switched on.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up when
the steering wheel heater is switched on.
Programmable buttons* on steering
wheel
You can program the buttons individually.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Steering wheel buttons" is
selected and press the controller.
A list of different functions appears:
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice instructions of the navigation sys-
tem
*
> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanently shutting off outside air,
refer to AUC Automatic recirculated air
control on page 107
> "Mute on / off"
Mutes the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off"
Switches the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"
*
Display/hide phone book or last list of
stored phone numbers displayed
> "Next entertainment source"
Changes audio source
> Switches "Night Vision on / off"
BMW Night Vision
*
on/off
5. Select the desired function unit and press
the controller.
6. Select the button if necessary and press the
controller.
You can now activate the selected function
using the corresponding button.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating function
Press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for one of the buttons:
> To switch voice instructions on/off:
Maintain pressure on the button for several
seconds.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
56
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported in the rear in child restraint sys-
tems which correspond to the age, weight and
height of the child. Otherwise there is an
increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
size and weight.
With the exception of the driver's seat, all seats
in your BMW comply with the recommenda-
tions of the standard SAE J1819 for the safe
securing of child restraint systems in motor
vehicles.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front, knee and side airbag on the pas-
senger side must be deactivated. Otherwise,
there is an increased risk of injury for the child if
the airbags are triggered, even with a child
restraint system. Your BMW center will be glad
to advise you.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 93.
Installing child restraint
systems
Follow child-restraint system manufac-
turer's instructions for the selection,
installation and use of child restraint systems.
Otherwise the degree of protection they offer
may be reduced.<
Child seat security
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked against pulling
out to secure child restraint systems.
Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com-
pletely.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Coupe: child restraint system with
tether strap
There are two additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows.
Placement of tether strap
1. Fold anchor fitting into upright position.
2. Push head restraint downward.
3. Guide tether strap over head restraint and
hook onto anchor fitting.
LATCH child-restraint fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To attach a LATCH child's seat, follow the
operating and safety instructions of the
child's seat manufacturer.<
Rear seats
The mountings for the LATCH child-restraint
fixing system are located under the points
marked with the symbols. They are not visible
from the outside.
Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull
the belt away from the region of the child-
restraint fixing system.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving
58
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
> Radio readiness switches on.
Some electrical devices are ready for oper-
ation.
> The electric steering-wheel lock audibly
disengages.
Before moving the vehicle, insert the
remote control into the ignition lock;
otherwise, the electric steering-wheel lock will
not be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be
steered.<
Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Briefly press in the remote control; it pops out
slightly.
> The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.
> The electric steering-wheel lock audibly
engages.
Automatic transmission
The remote control can only be removed when
the selector lever is in position P: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button several
times switches the radio readiness or the igni-
tion on and off.
Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button
with the brake or clutch pedal depressed
starts the engine.<
Radio readiness
Some electrical devices are ready for operation.
The time and outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> with comfort access
*
by touching the sen-
sitive surface on the door handle, refer to
Locking doors on page 37
Ignition on
All current consumers are ready for operation.
The odometer and the trip odometer are dis-
played in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 74.
Please switch off the ignition and the cur-
rent consumers which are not required
when the engine is not running to save the bat-
tery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhaling of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run-
ning, set the selector lever to the idling or the
P position and set the handbrake, otherwise the
vehicle can begin to roll.<
When starting the engine, do not press the
accelerator pedal.
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive immediately at a moder-
ate engine speed.
Do not press either the brake or the clutch
pedal as long as you do not want to start
the engine. The engine starts immediately
when you briefly press the Start/Stop button
and press the brake pedal with an automatic
transmission, or the clutch pedal with a manual
transmission.<
Manual transmission
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the
idling position.
3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engag-
ing the starter for a certain period and automat-
ically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.
Automatic transmission*
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Place selector lever in position P or N.
3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engag-
ing the starter for a certain period and automat-
ically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Move selector lever into position N and
make sure that this position is also indi-
cated in instrument cluster.
3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engag-
ing the starter for a certain period and automat-
ically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.
If the engine fails to start, depress the
brake pedal and press the selector lever
to the right and then back into position N.
Watch the display in the instrument cluster
while doing so.<
Special starting conditions
Depress the accelerator pedal halfway when
starting the engine in the following situations:
> The engine fails to start on the first attempt,
e.g. if it is very hot or cold.
> The engine is started at very low tempera-
tures, below approx. +57/–156, at high
altitudes, over approx. 3,300 ft/1,000 m.
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned at all or is burned inade-
quately and there is a danger of overheating and
damage to the catalytic converter.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving
60
Switching engine off
Do not remove the remote control from
the ignition lock while the vehicle is roll-
ing, otherwise the steering wheel lock would
engage while steering.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
remote control with you.
When parking on a downhill incline, apply the
handbrake, as otherwise the vehicle could roll
away.<
Manual transmission
1. Briefly press Start/Stop button with vehicle
stopped.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Apply handbrake.
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*
1. Apply handbrake.
2. Move selector lever into a drive position.
3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
If the position N is engaged when the
engine is switched off, this is pointed out
visually and acoustically.
Automatic transmission*
1. Move selector lever into position P with
vehicle stopped.
2. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
Handbrake
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig-
nal also sounds when starting off. The
handbrake is engaged.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Engaging
The lever engages automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to engage the hand-
brake while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it
too strongly. In doing so, continuously press the
button of the handbrake lever. Otherwise,
excessive pressure can lead to the rear wheels
locking up and loss of traction – fishtailing – at
the rear axle.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the hand-
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the hand-
brake is engaged.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th/6th gear, press the
selector-lever toward the right, otherwise
an inadvertent shift into 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Press the gearshift lever to the left, overcoming
a slight resistance.
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*
The concept
The SMG Sequential Manual Transmission is
an automated manual transmission in which an
electrohydraulic system handles the clutching
and gear changes.
The SMG is operated with the selector lever
and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.
It offers the following functions:
> Choice of manual or automatic mode:
Sequential mode or Drive mode
> Choice of two drive programs: Normal or
Sport, refer to Dynamic Driving Control
page 64
> Automatic downshifting and prevention of
incorrect shifting even in sequential opera-
tion
> Acceleration assistant, refer to page 64
Selector lever positions
> R: Reverse gear
> N: Neutral, idle
> One-touch functions for Sequential mode:
+: manual upshifting
–: manual downshifting
> D: activate/deactivate the Drive mode
The transmission automatically shifts
into N if the driver's door is opened with
the engine running and neither the pedals, the
shift paddles nor the selector lever are oper-
ated.
This is signaled by an acoustic signal and the
flashing display N in the instrument cluster; a
message appears on the Control Display.<
Gear display
R N 1 to 6
The currently engaged gear is displayed pre-
ceded by a D in Drive mode.
This display is your only way to be sure
the desired selector lever position is actu-
ally engaged.<
Shiftlock
Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;
the shift command will not be executed unless
the brake is applied.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Sequential mode
After every engine start, as soon as the selector
lever is pushed to the right and the brake pedal
is pressed, the Sequential mode is activated.
You can shift up and down using the shifting
paddles or the selector-lever. You do not need
to remove your foot from the accelerator to do
so.
It is also possible to start off in second gear, e.g.
in slippery conditions.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving
62
In the following situations, SMG thinks for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, the system will not execute a
downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev.
> When the vehicle is stationary, the trans-
mission automatically downshifts into first
gear.
> Shortly before dropping below a gear-
dependent minimum speed, the transmis-
sion downshifts automatically even without
your intervention.
D Drive mode
In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
To switch from Sequential to Drive mode:
briefly press the selector-lever to the right
toward D.
Kick-down: for rapid acceleration, e.g. passing,
press the accelerator pedal as far down as it will
go. You achieve maximum acceleration.
To switch back to the Sequential mode: press
selector-lever to the right again toward D or
shift using the shifting paddles or the selector-
lever.
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by applying the throt-
tle, but engage the handbrake instead. Other-
wise, overheating can occur in the region of the
transmission.<
Gear changes
Using selector-lever
> To upshift, pull the selector-lever back.
> To downshift, push the selector-lever for-
ward.
Using shift paddles on steering wheel
> To upshift, pull one of the shift paddles.
> To shift down, press.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
also shift manually with Steptronic, refer to
page 63.
Selector-lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in instrument cluster
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector-lever position is indicated, and in
manual mode, the gear currently engaged.
Changing selector-lever positions
> Only move the selector-lever from
position P with the engine running: inter-
lock.
> With the vehicle stopped, press the brake
before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the
selector lever is blocked: shiftlock.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.<
An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts
into selector-lever positions R and P. To cancel
the interlock, press the button on the front of
the selector-lever knob, refer to arrow.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select N in car washes, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation.
All forward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in posi-
tion D.
Kick-down
The kick-down mode provides maximum accel-
eration:
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sport program and
manual operation M/S
Move the selector-lever from position D to the
left into shifting slot M/S:
The sport program is activated and DS is dis-
played in the instrument cluster. This position is
recommended for a performance-oriented driv-
ing style. It is engaged automatically when the
Dynamic Driving Control is activated, refer to
Dynamic Driving Control.
When the selector-lever is briefly moved for-
ward or back, the manual mode is activated and
the Steptronic shifts gear. The instrument clus-
ter shows M1 through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
the system will not execute a downshift that
would cause the engine to overrev. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, followed by the current gear.
To use the automatic function again, move the
selector-lever to the right into position D.
Deactivating selector lever interlock
If the selector lever is blocked in the position P
even though the button on the selector lever is
pressed, the selector lever interlock can be
deactivated:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving
64
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
toolkit, refer to page 201, press the lever at
the point marked in red and move the selec-
tor lever into the desired position.
Dynamic Driving Control
The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible
for your BMW to react in an even more perfor-
mance-oriented manner at the push of a button:
> The engine responds more spontaneously
to accelerator pedal movements.
> Cruise control:
The stored speed is reached more quickly
when requested.
Additionally with SMG:
> Gearshifts are faster.
> The engine speed range is used optimally in
the Drive mode.
With automatic transmission:
> The Sport program is activated.
Activating system
With the ignition switched on, press the SPORT
button.
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Deactivating system
> Press the SPORT button again or
> shift into reverse or
> switch off the engine.
The LED in the button and SPORT in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Acceleration assistant with SMG
The acceleration assistant enables optimized
vehicle acceleration at race car level on road
surfaces with good adhesion when starting off.
Do not use the acceleration assistant too
often; otherwise, components will wear
prematurely.<
1. Activate the Dynamic Driving Control.
2. Deactivate DSC, refer to page 87.
3. Press the accelerator pedal down fully:
Kick-down. The ideal starting-off engine
speed is set.
To maintain the vehicle stability, reacti-
vate DSC afterward.<
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Using turn signals
Move the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, only press the lever as
far as the resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates the failure of a turn signal
lamp.<
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there as long as you wish to signal.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn
signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.
5. Select "Triple turn signal activation" and
press the controller.
Triple turn signal is activated.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating rain sensor
4 Cleaning windshield, headlamps and
BMW Night Vision camera
*
5 Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Standard wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermit-
tent mode whenever the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wipe
Briefly press twice or press beyond the resis-
tance point.
The system reverts to operation at normal
speed whenever the vehicle is stationary.
Rain sensor
Wiper operation is controlled automatically as a
function of the rain intensity. The rain sensor is
located on the windshield, directly in front of the
interior rearview mirror.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving
66
Activating rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the knurled wheel 5.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undes-
ired wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield, headlamps and
BMW Night Vision camera*
Pull the lever, arrow 4:
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
With the vehicle lighting switched on, the head-
lights and the BMW Night Vision camera are
also cleaned simultaneously at suitable inter-
vals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be
obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid
antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use
washers when the washer fluid reservoir is
empty, as this will damage the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated with the engine running or the igni-
tion switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Always keep it well away from sparks and
open flames, and store it in tightly closed con-
tainers well out of the reach of children. Always
follow the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<
Washer fluid reservoir
All washer jets are supplied from one reservoir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<
Capacity
Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
The cruise control is available for use at speeds
of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The
vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you
set using the lever mounted on the steering col-
umn.
Do not use the cruise control under driv-
ing conditions that do not permit a con-
stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
One lever for all functions
1 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
accelerating
2 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
3 Interrupting cruise control
4 Resuming stored speed
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
accelerating
Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:
The system maintains and stores the current
vehicle speed. The display 1 in the speedome-
ter, see below, indicates this regulated speed.
Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's
speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press the lever to the resistance point and
hold it:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system maintains
and stores your current speed as soon as you
release the lever.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point:
Increase speed by 5 mph/10 km/h.
The vehicle may accelerate beyond the regu-
lated speed on steep downhill stretches where
the engine's braking action alone may not be
sufficient to slow the vehicle. Speed can drop
on uphill grades if the engine output is insuffi-
cient.
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2:
Functions are the same as 1, only the vehicle
speed is reduced.
Interrupting cruise control
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.
Cruise control is also interrupted automatically:
> When you apply pressure to the brake pedal
> When you depress the clutch pedal or shift
the automatic transmission/SMG into posi-
tion N
> When the DSC comes on
Resuming stored speed
Press button 4:
The vehicle accelerates to and maintains the
stored speed.
Deactivating system
When the ignition is switched off, the system is
deactivated and the stored speed is deleted.
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
2 Selected desired speed appears briefly
Active cruise control*
The concept
With active cruise control, you can select a
desired speed which is not only automatically
maintained when driving on open roadways, but
also varied to maintain a selected distance set-
ting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active cruise control is a technological advance
over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome
relief from the constant adjustment of speed
that can accompany driving in traffic on free-
ways or other high-speed thoroughfares.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving
68
Especially on longer trips, the system can
reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing
your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely
and responsibly.
In addition to holding a steady cruising speed,
if you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active
cruise control will, within the scope of given
possibilities, adjust your vehicle's speed auto-
matically so that you can flow with the traffic
without having to make constant adjustments.
If, for example, while cruising at the selected
speed, you begin to approach a slower vehicle
ahead of you in the same lane, the system will
reduce your vehicle's speed to the same as that
of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected
distance setting between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. You can vary the distance, which
is also speed-dependent. Based on your
selected distance setting, the system automat-
ically decreases the throttle setting and lightly
applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle
brake lamps will automatically illuminate to sig-
nal a following driver to take action. In addition,
it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver
to downshift, depending on the kind of trans-
mission your vehicle is equipped with, to main-
tain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle
ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead
becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to
the speed you have selected by increasing the
throttle setting and shifting gears automatically
or with the aid of the driver as needed. Your
selected speed will be maintained when driving
downhill, too.
Active cruise control is not and must not
be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
Since this active cruise control system is
a new technology and operates differ-
ently from conventional cruise control systems
which you may be accustomed to, you are
strongly urged to read all of the pages relating
to this system before use. Pay special attention
to the information contained in the Things to
know about active cruise control section begin-
ning on page 71.<
Professional* navigation system
If there is a navigation DVD in the player, refer to
page 124, then the system adapts the acceler-
ation and deceleration behavior of the vehicle to
the road on which you are currently driving.
To ensure that the system is informed of
the current course of the road, always use
the latest navigation DVD if possible.<
The influence exerted by the navigation system
is canceled when the vehicle position is
unknown, e.g. when it has left the mapped
region.
Brake pedal feel
> When the system brakes and you also
depress the brake pedal, a somewhat differ-
ent braking feeling results.
> Any noises produced during automatic
braking are normal.
Manual transmission
You can shift gears with the cruise control acti-
vated. If you drive for extended periods at very
high or very low engine speeds, then a shifting
command is issued or the system is deacti-
vated.
SMG
If you drive for extended periods at very high
engine speeds in Sequential mode, then a shift-
ing command is issued or the system is deacti-
vated.
In the Drive mode, the SMG acts similarly to an
automatic transmission in the D position.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating active cruise control
1 Store and increase desired speed
2 Store and decrease desired speed
3 Deactivate system, refer to page 70
4 Resume stored desired speed and dis-
tance, refer to page 70
5 Select following distance to vehicle ahead,
refer to page 69
Maintaining current speed
Briefly press lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull lever,
arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.
20 mph or 30 km/h.
The speed currently being driven is stored and
maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer
and briefly in the instrument cluster.
Selecting desired speed
Adjust your desired speed to the traffic
conditions and remain ready to brake at
all times, otherwise accidents can occur.<
The desired speed can drop on uphill grades if
the engine output is insufficient.
Increasing in steps
Briefly press the lever repeatedly up to the
resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the
desired speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed up to
the resistance point, the desired speed
increases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed
beyond the resistance point, the desired
speed is increased by a maximum of 5 mph
or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of
110mph or 180km/h is reached.
The speed then displayed is stored and
reached on a clear road.
Decreasing in steps
Briefly pull the lever repeatedly up to the resis-
tance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired
speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled up to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed decreases
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or
10 km/h until the minimum speed of
20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.
The speed then displayed is stored and
reached on a clear road.
Select distance
> Rotary switch downward:
Increase distance
> Rotary switch upward:
Decrease distance
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving
70
The selected distance is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Use good judgment to select the appro-
priate following distance given road con-
ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec-
ommendations for a safe following distance.<
Deactivate system
Press the lever up or down. The displays in the
instrument cluster disappear.
You also deactivate the system when you apply
the brakes, shift very slowly, or shift into neutral.
In addition, the system is deactivated automati-
cally:
> when you activate the DTC Dynamic Trac-
tion Control
> when you deactivate the DSC Dynamic Sta-
bility Control
> when the system does not recognize any
objects for a longer time, e.g. on infre-
quently traveled roads without a shoulder or
guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered
with dirt, refer to page 71
> when the speed is reduced to below
20 mph/30 km/h due to a traffic situation
The system deactivates automatically
when the speed is set to below 20 mph/
30 km/h. A signal sounds and a message
appears in the Control Display. The active inter-
vention of the driver is required, otherwise there
is the danger of an accident.<
Resume stored desired speed and
distance
Press button 4.
The displays appear in the instrument cluster.
When you switch off the ignition, the stored
desired speed is deleted.
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
2 Lights up yellow: vehicle driving ahead is
detected
Flashes red, a signal sounds: the system
cannot establish the distance, you must
apply the brakes
Flashes yellow: driving stability control sys-
tems intervene, the active cruise control is
deactivated
3 Selected distance to vehicle driving ahead:
lights up as soon as the system is activated
4 Selected desired speed appears briefly
If the display ACC --- mph/km/h briefly
appears in the instrument cluster, it might
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
This distance is set when the sys-
tem is used for the first time after
starting the engine.
Distance 4
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
be that conditions necessary for operation are
not currently being met. To call up Check Con-
trol messages, refer to page 79.<
Warning lamps
The display 2 flashes red and a sig-
nal sounds.
The system is warning you to inter-
vene by braking or executing an
evasive maneuver. The active
cruise control cannot automatically restore the
distance to the vehicle driving ahead.
This display does not, however, relieve the
driver of the responsibility for adapting desired
speed and driving style to traffic conditions.
The display 2 flashes yellow.
Automatic intervention by ABS or
DSC. The active cruise control
intervenes by braking until you
actively take over.
Radar sensor
Heavy rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair the
detection of vehicles ahead. If necessary, clean
the radar sensor under the front bumper. In
doing so, be especially careful when removing
layers of snow and ice.
If the sensor is incorrectly aligned, the active
cruise control cannot be activated.
Things to know about active cruise control
As with conventional cruise control sys-
tems, active cruise control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own
personal responsibility, alertness and aware-
ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active cruise control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in
city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush
hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or
roads with sharp curves such as highway off-
ramps; during inclement weather such as snow,
heavy rain or fog; or when entering inter-
changes, service/parking areas or toll booths.
It is also important to regulate your vehicle's
speed and distance setting within applicable
legal limits. Always be ready to take action or
apply the brakes if necessary, especially when
the system is actively following a vehicle in front
of you.<
Always remember that the range and abil-
ity of the system does have physical limi-
tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate
your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi-
cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead
of you, as for example at a traffic light or when
approaching a parked vehicle. Also, the system
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving
72
does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians
or other types of potential traffic such as a rider
on horseback. It is also possible that the system
may not detect smaller moving objects such as
motorcycles or bicycles. Be especially alert
when encountering any of these situations as
the system will neither automatically brake, nor
provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that
every decrease in the distance setting allows
your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front
of you and requires a heightened amount of
alertness.<
If your vehicle is actively following a vehicle in
front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds up or
the lane ahead becomes clear, then your vehi-
cle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,
unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-
ramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a highway may cause a delay in the system's
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle actually in the
lane next to you. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary.
Active cruise control can only decelerate the
vehicle to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. If the sys-
tem reduces vehicle speed below 20 mph/
30 km/h or if DSC/ABS is engaged while driving,
the system will automatically deactivate.
Remember, the system cannot stop your
vehicle. In addition, the system is deacti-
vated whenever the driver applies the vehicle
brakes, shifts into neutral, or deactivates DSC.
After any deactivation, the system will no longer
automatically activate the vehicle brakes, which
means the driver must intervene and resume
manual braking. You should then reactivate the
system only when you are fully aware of the
prior speed and distance settings.<
Active cruise control may brake when you
reduce the stored desired speed; however, the
driver must constantly monitor traffic and inter-
vene if necessary.
When you switch off the engine or ignition,
active cruise control is fully switched off, too,
and any settings you have selected are can-
celed.
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane
into your lane, active cruise control will not rec-
ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane
ahead of your vehicle.
Behavior in curves
Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-
leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-
ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
In approaching a curve, it is possible that active
cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either
case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-
ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Driver interventions
Anytime the driver presses down on the
accelerator pedal, any automatic braking
action by the system is interrupted until the
pedal is fully released. After doing this, release
the accelerator and the system again controls
your cruising speed and distance setting. While
driving with the system activated, resting your
foot on the accelerator pedal will cause the sys-
tem not to brake even if necessary. Be certain
that floormats or other objects on the vehicle
floor do not interfere with movement of the
accelerator pedal.<
While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the sys-
tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply.
The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed due to large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Example: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed, such as approaching a toll booth or
when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you
at close range.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything under control
74
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Time, outside temperature, and date
2 Odometer and trip odometer
3 Press button:
> with ignition switched on, trip odometer
is reset
> briefly display the time, outside temper-
ature and odometer with the ignition
switched off
With the ignition lock at radio readiness or
higher the outside temperature and the time are
displayed.
To request the date:
Press the CHECK button on the turn signal
lever, refer to page 79.
To set time and date, refer to page 82.
You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the
Control Display, refer to Units of measure on
page 84.
Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Ice can form even at temperatures above
+377/+3 6. Drive carefully, especially
on bridges and shaded roadways; otherwise,
your risk of accident increases.<
Tachometer
The white-striped advance warning field,
arrow 1, changes depending on the engine
temperature. The segments disappear in
sequence as the engine warms to its normal
operating temperature.
Avoid allowing the engine speed to rise as far as
the advance warning field whenever possible.
It is absolutely crucial to avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field, arrow 2.
In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to
protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant and therefore the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 197.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Engine oil temperature gauge
During normal operation, the engine oil temper-
ature is between approx. 1607/706 and
approx. 3407/1706.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage is shown on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 gallons/
70 liters. You can find information on refueling
on page 186.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the remaining range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in instrument cluster
To display the information, press the BC button
in the turn signal lever from radio readiness.
The following information is displayed in the
specified order:
> Remaining range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Cruising range
Displays the estimated remaining range avail-
able with the remaining fuel. The range is pro-
jected based on the driving style over the last
20 miles/30 km.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
off are not included in the calculations of aver-
age speed.
To reset the average speed: press the BC but-
ton in the turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
You can use the Control Display to view your
fuel consumption rate over two different dis-
tances, refer to Displays on Control Display or
Trip computer.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything under control
76
To reset the average fuel consumption: press
the BC button in the turn signal lever for approx.
2seconds.
Displays on Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive, for
explanation of principle, refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-
troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination:
> Entering a distance manually in the com-
puter, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system
*
, refer to page 125.
> Cruising range
> Distance to destination:
> Entering a distance manually in the com-
puter, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system
*
, refer to page 125.
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm.
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance
to your destination. If necessary, hold it
against a slight resistance to enter a greater
difference.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically predetermined
during the destination guidance of the naviga-
tion system
*
.
Trip computer
The trip computer is suitable for a vacation trip,
for example.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-
troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting
all values:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
Display options
You can display the computer or the trip com-
puter in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Onboard info"
> "Trip computer".
3. Press the controller.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
Your BMW Service Advisor can deter-
mine your vehicle's current service
requirements by reading out the data stored in
the remote control.<
Additional information
You can view more detailed information by
using the Control Display, for explanation of
principle, refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything under control
78
4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Status" and press the controller.
The display shows a list of selected service and
maintenance procedures, as well as legally
mandated official inspections.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or an official
inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering dates for state emission and
vehicle inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, refer to page 83; other-
wise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based
Service is not ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Status" and press the controller.
6. Select "Emission inspect." or "State
inspection" and press the controller.
7. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is highlighted.
8. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
9. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
10. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
11. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-
function in the monitored systems. A Check
Control message of this kind includes indicator
or warning lamps in the instrument cluster, pos-
sibly an acoustic signal, and text messages at
the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up both in
the display area 1 and in the display 2 in various
combinations and colors.
This symbol means that a Check Control
message has been generated. The symbol
remains visible even if the Check Control mes-
sage has been hidden after a short time. The
combinations of warning lamps and text mes-
sages are stored and can be viewed later, also
refer to page 80.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-
trol Display explain the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps displayed.
You can display supplementary information
regarding most Check Control messages, e.g.
as to the cause of a malfunction and corre-
sponding actions to be taken, see below.
In cases of corresponding urgency, this infor-
mation is immediately displayed when the
associated lamps light up.
To exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Importance of Check Control
messages
Important Check Control messages are
retained until the malfunctions have been recti-
fied. They cannot be deleted. If a number of
these malfunctions occur simultaneously, they
are displayed in succession.
Less important messages disappear after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain in the memory.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything under control
80
To hide these Check Control messages:
Press the CHECK button on the turn signal
lever.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button longer:
The first stored message is displayed.
2. Press the button:
A new message appears each time you
press the button.
Displaying supplementary information
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
4. Select "Check Control messages" and
press the controller.
5. Select a message and press the controller.
To exit from the menu immediately:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying the urgency of malfunctions
Depending on the equipment, the stored Check
Control messages are also displayed with the
following symbols:
No malfunctions detected in the moni-
tored systems.
Malfunctions detected in the monitored
systems. Depending on the malfunction,
supplementary information is shown on
the Control Display.
The symbols also indicate the status of the ser-
vice requirements display, refer to page 77.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Displays after completion of trip
Malfunction reports generated during the trip
are shown consecutively when you switch off
the ignition.
Before the display disappears, you can display
the messages once again. Press the CHECK
button for approx. 2 seconds. If several mes-
sages are present, you can press the CHECK
button repeatedly.
The display:
> turns off automatically after a brief period
> can be turned off at any time by pressing
the CHECK button again for approx. 2 sec-
onds
Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached
this speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing limit
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
5. Select the speed value and press the con-
troller.
6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If neces-
sary, hold it against a slight resistance to
enter a greater difference.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The limit is automatically switched on.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system applies your current
speed as the limit.
Activating limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
The limit is automatically switched on.
Stopwatch
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
ler.
Starting, stopping, or resetting
> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it
was running beforehand.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything under control
82
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
Taking an intermediate time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues to operate
in the background.<
Settings on Control Display
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu appears.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"
is selected and press the controller.
Setting time
1. Move the controller once to the front if nec-
essary to change to the first field from the
top.
2. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Making settings
1. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The changed time is stored.
Activating hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before each full
hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
Setting time format
1. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting date
1. Select "Date" and press the controller.
2. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first section of the date display is high-
lighted, in this case the month
3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
4. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next adjustment is highlighted.
5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
Changing date format
1. Select "Date format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness of Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the base setting.
1. Select "Brightness" and press the control-
ler.
2. If necessary, move the controller to the right
to select "Display".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything under control
84
Units of measure
You can change the units of measure for fuel
consumption, distances, temperature and
pressure.
1. Select "Units" and press the controller.
2. Select the menu item to be set.
3. Press the controller.
4. Select the desired unit of measure and
press the controller.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Language on Control Display
1. Select "Languages" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Text language" and press the con-
troller. You can select a different language
for the text displays.
3. Select the desired language and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical display
*
alert
you to the approach of an object from behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.
The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
However, an acoustic warning first sound for
the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor-
ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center
rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate the
presence of objects when they are being
approached slowly, as is usually the case when
parking. Avoid approaching an object at high
speed; otherwise, the physical circumstances
could cause the system warning to be activated
too late.<
Automatic switch-on
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system starts to operate automatically
approx. 1 second after you shift into reverse.
Wait this short period before driving.
Switching on manually
Press the button; the LED lights up.
Switching off manually
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.
Signal tones
An intermittent signal indicates the distance of
the vehicle from an object being approached.
Thus, an object detected to the left rear of the
vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from
the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance
between vehicle and object decreases, the
intervals between the tones become shorter. If
the distance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone
sounds.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal-
functioning. Have the system checked.
As a preventive measure, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean-
ers for long periods and maintain a distance of
at least 4 in/10 cm to them.
PDC with visual warning*
You can also enjoy the option of having the sys-
tem show the approach to an object on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are already shown there before a signal tone
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
86
sounds. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "PDC" is selected and press
the controller.
5. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-
troller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display appears on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstacles always remains with
the driver. Even when sensors are involved,
there is a blind spot in which objects cannot be
detected. This applies especially in those cases
where the system approaches the physical con-
straints of ultrasonic measurement, as occurs
with tow bars and trailer couplings, and in the
vicinity of thin or wedge-shaped objects. Low
objects already displayed, e.g. a curb, can dis-
appear from the detection area of the sensors
again before a continuous tone sounds. Higher,
protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be
detected. Loud noises from outside and inside
the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the
PDC signal tone.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents the wheels from locking during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during hard braking. This increases active
driving safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. For information on safe braking, refer to
page 119.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
This system provides further enhancements to
vehicle stability and steering response when
braking while cornering or when braking during
a lane change.
Electronic brake-force distribution
This system controls the brake system's appli-
cation pressure at the rear wheels to ensure
stable deceleration.
DBC Dynamic Brake Control
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when starting off and accelerating. DSC also
detects unstable driving conditions such as
fishtailing or sliding of the vehicle's front
wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle
safely stay on course within the physical limits
by reducing the engine output and by applying
the brakes differently in the individual wheels.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Do not reduce the additional safety mar-
gin of the system by taking risks.<
Deactivating DSC
Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up, but not for
longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic
Traction Control and DSC are deactivated
together. Interventions promoting stability and
forward momentum will no longer be carried
out. The stability-promoting intervention of the
active steering
*
is also deactivated, refer to
page 92.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
To support enhanced operating stability, reacti-
vate DSC again as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp comes on:
DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
DTC is a variant of DSC for special road condi-
tions, e.g. uncleared snow-covered roads, that
is optimized for forward momentum. The sys-
tem ensures maximum forward momentum, but
with limited driving stability. Therefore, drive
with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or
on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or when
starting off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
*
Activating DTC
Press the button; the DTC indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp comes on:
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
Dynamic Drive*
The concept
Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti-
mizes vehicle stability during cornering and
evasive maneuvers.
Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on
the front and rear axles. Suspension compli-
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
88
ance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying
from performance-oriented during cornering to
smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle
is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle
operation, the system continuously runs
through closed-loop control cycles lasting only
fractions of a second.
The system assumes operational status each
time you start the engine.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control Dis-
play. There is a malfunction in the sys-
tem. Have the system checked as soon as pos-
sible.
If a malfunction occurs, please remember
to adapt your speed accordingly, espe-
cially in curves.
The suspension will be noticeably softer and
the vehicle will display a greater tendency to tilt
during cornering and in crosswinds.
If a message stating that you should stop is
shown on the Control Display, stop at a suitable
location and switch off the engine as soon as
possible. In this case the oil level in the reservoir
may have dropped below the minimum, possi-
bly owing to a leak in the hydraulic system. Do
not continue driving, but instead contact your
BMW center.<
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the infla-
tion pressures in the tires as you drive. The sys-
tem provides an alert whenever the inflation
pressure drops significantly in relation to the
pressure in another tire.
In the event of a pressure loss, the rolling radius
and therefore the rotation speed of the wheels
change. This change is detected and signaled
as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
To ensure the reliable signaling of a flat tire, the
system must be initialized at the correct tire
inflation pressure.
The initialization must be repeated after
every correction of the tire inflation pres-
sure and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural,
even pressure drop in all four tires.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snow-covered or slippery roads
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains
*
Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is auto-
matically continued.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains
*
.<
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Select "FTM" and press the controller.
5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
6. Select "Set tire pressure" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
8. Start to drive.
The message "Initializing..." is displayed.
The initialization is completed during driving.
Then the message "Status: FTM active"
appears on the Control Display again.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up in red. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to
below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden brak-
ing and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed
a vehicle speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer
equipped with run-flat tires, as it was
when it came from the factory, refer to
page 192. Continued driving after a flat tire
can result in serious accidents.<
2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on run-flat
tires, based on the following guide values:
> With low load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km.
> With medium load:
2 persons, luggage compartment full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 94 miles/150 km.
> With full load:
4 persons, luggage compartment full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Drive reservedly and do not exceed
a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the
event of pressure loss, vehicle handling
changes. This includes reduced tracking
stability in braking, extended braking dis-
tances and altered natural steering charac-
teristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur
while the vehicle is being driven, this can
indicate final failure of the damaged tire.
Reduce speed and stop at a suitable loca-
tion as soon as possible; otherwise, pieces
of the tire could become detached and
cause an accident. Do not continue driving,
but instead contact your BMW center.<
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid-
erably in one or several tires.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
90
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, as
otherwise fault-free operation of the system is
not ensured.
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influ-
ences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, or if TPM is temporarily interfered
with by other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correc-
tion is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.
Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
A wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio fre-
quency
> Malfunction
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "TPM" and press the controller.
5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
6. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
8. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla-
tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set
values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur-
ing driving. The tires are shown in gray on the
Control Display and "Status: TPM active" is dis-
played again.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis-
play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<
Message with low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer
equipped with run-flat tires, as it was
when it came from the factory, refer to
page 192. Continued driving after a flat tire
can result in serious accidents.<
2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, luggage compartment full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 persons, luggage compartment full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distances and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible;
otherwise, pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving, but instead contact your BMW
center.<
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Dis-
play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
> In case of a malfunction;
have the system checked.
> If a wheels is mounted without TPM elec-
tronics
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
92
Active steering*
The concept
The active steering is a system that actively var-
ies the steering angle of the front wheels in rela-
tion to the steering wheel movements.
When you are driving in the low road speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-
ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes
very direct. In the higher speed range, on the
other hand, the steering angle is reduced more
and more. This improves the handling capability
of your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stability-pro-
moting intervention is deactivated when DSC is
switched off, refer to page 86.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control Dis-
play. The active steering is no longer
operational. At low speed, larger steering wheel
movements are required, while the vehicle
reacts more sensitively to steering wheel move-
ments in the higher road speed range. The sta-
bility-promoting intervention can also be deac-
tivated. Proceed cautiously and drive
defensively. Have the system checked.
Brake force display
> Left-hand picture: normal braking.
> Right-hand picture: heavy braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags
4 Knee airbag
5 Knee airbag
Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 47.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of a side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head airbag supports the head. The knee airbag
protects the legs from colliding with the cockpit.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to
remove the airbag retention system from the
vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the
wiring or the individual components in the air-
bag system. This category includes the uphol-
stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the
instrument panel, the side trim panels on the
doors and on the Coupe, the roof pillars along
with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt
to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components
directly after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-
bag generators carried out only by a BMW cen-
ter or a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with appropriately trained
personnel and has the required explosives
licenses. Unprofessional attempts to service
the system could lead to failure in an emer-
gency or undesired airbag activation, either of
which could result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-
face of the front passenger seat. The system
correspondingly activates or deactivates the
front, knee and side airbag on the front passen-
ger side.
The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags below.<
Before transporting a child in the front
passenger seat, read the safety informa-
tion and follow the instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 56.
The front, knee and side airbag on the front pas-
senger side can be deactivated for teenagers
and adults in certain seat positions; the indica-
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up when this occurs. In these cases, change the
seat position so that the front passenger air-
bags are activated and the indicator lamp goes
out. If the desired status cannot be produced by
changing the seat position, transport the corre-
sponding person in the rear seat.
Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding,
beaded mats or other items onto the front pas-
senger seat unless they are specifically recom-
mended by BMW. Do not place objects under
the seat which could press against the seat
from below. Otherwise a correct evaluation of
the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<
Operating state of front passenger
airbags
The illustration here shows a possible arrange-
ment in the Coupe. With some vehicle equip-
ment packages or in the Convertible, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags indicates the operating status of the front,
knee and side airbag on the front passenger
side depending on whether the seat is occu-
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
94
pied. The indicator lamp shows whether the
front passenger airbags are activated or deacti-
vated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint system intended for the
purpose is properly detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbag on the front
passenger side are deactivated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
But the front, knee and side airbag on the
front passenger side are still deactivated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
From radio readiness, refer to page 58, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag sys-
tem and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up as of radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immedi-
ately in case of a malfunction; otherwise,
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of an accident or a critical
driving situation, extreme inclination on the lon-
gitudinal or transverse axis, or loss of ground
contact. The rollover bars located behind the
rear head restraints are deployed within frac-
tions of a second.
As a supplement to the rollover bar integrated
into the windshield frame, the rollover protec-
tion system ensures that all vehicle occupants
have the necessary headroom.
Always keep the path of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In less severe accidents, you are protected by
the fastened safety belt and, depending on the
severity of the accident, the belt tensioner and
the multistage airbag restraint system.<
Lowering
If the rollover protection system experienced no
impact after automatic activation, then it can be
lowered again. No tools are necessary for this
purpose.
1. Press the release backward and hold in that
position.
2. Press the rollover protection unit halfway
down from above.
3. Let go of the release.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Press the rollover protection unit down until
it snaps into place.
5. Use the same procedure for the second roll-
over protection unit.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after unexpected triggering.
Never move the convertible top when the
rollover protection system is raised.
No changes of any nature may be made to the
individual components of the rollover protec-
tion system and wiring.
Work on the rollover protection system may
only be performed at a BMW center.
Unprofessional attempts to service the system
can lead to failure or malfunction.
For a system check and to ensure long-term
functioning, you must comply with the mainte-
nance intervals of the service requirements,
refer to page 77.<
Head-Up Display*
The concept
With the Head-Up Display, important informa-
tion is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
absorb this information without looking away
from the road.
Switching on/off
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on:
Press the button to activate or deactivate this
system.
1 Navigation instructions
2 Display
> Cruise control
> Active cruise control
3 Speed
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
96
Selecting displays
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Head-Up Display" and press the
controller.
5. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis-
play.
6. Press the controller.
The information is shown on the Head-
Up Display.
The settings are stored for the remote key cur-
rently in use.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of
the instrument lighting.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Brightness" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to select "Head-Up Display".
6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis-
play is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain sitting positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, please have the base
setting checked at a BMW center.
Specialized windshield
The windshield is a part of the system. The
shape of the windshield complies with the
requirements of the Head-Up Display to enable
a precise display. A film in the windshield pre-
vents double images from being displayed.
Have the windshield replaced only by a BMW
center or a repair shop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel.
Care instructions
You can find everything you need to know on
this topic by consulting the Caring for your vehi-
cle brochure.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a
display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may
result.<
BMW Night Vision*
The concept
BMW Night Vision is a driver assistance system
that is designed to provide enhanced vision for
certain objects at night. This can be especially
helpful for detecting people and larger animals.
When objects are detected, the driver may be
able to take appropriate action sooner. For
example, the driver may identify and detect the
presence of persons or animals in the road
ahead or off to the sides and can be more alert,
slow down or stop, blow the horn etc. The driver
can decide which actions are appropriate and
then react accordingly.
A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by
an infrared camera and a generated image is
shown on the Control Display. The resulting
thermal image shows the relative heat radiation
of the objects present in the camera's field of
view. Warmer objects appear brighter and
cooler objects appear darker. Contrast is
dependent on the temperature difference
between the objects and the background and
on the amount of heat radiation of the object
itself. As a result, it is quite possible that a per-
son is not continually recognizable as a person
in shape, since the thermal radiation can be
affected by different clothing which blocks heat
loss. Objects with little temperature difference
to the surrounding area, or little heat radiation
are less noticeable, for example in cold weather.
Any improvement in detection depends on
many factors such as the object size and tem-
perature compared to the surroundings, or
other nearby objects, the visual recognition
skills of the driver, weather conditions, and
other factors.
Driving hints
With the system active, periodically but briefly,
glance at the thermal image on the Control Dis-
play to notice objects that could be people or
larger animals. The glance should be similar to
glancing at the rear view mirror. Do not stare at
the image for long periods while driving, as this
will remove attention from the road. If you notice
an object of interest ahead, be prepared to slow
down or stop, blow the horn, or take other
appropriate action.
System limits
The system is designed to supplement but not
replace forward vision through the windshield.
The driver is responsible for safe driving at
night. BMW Night Vision is not designed to be
used as a continuous viewing window for driv-
ing at night.
No system, no matter how sophisticated, can
operate without limitations. BMW Night Vision
operation is subject to physical and environ-
mental limitations that will reduce the ability of
the system to detect and display a clear thermal
image. Some of the situations in which these
limitations can occur are:
> on steep hilltops or depressions and in tight
curves
> in tunnels, as the contrast is inherently low
> when the camera lens is dirty
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
98
> in dense fog, heavy rain or snowfall
> when displaying very hot objects such as
transformers, car exhausts etc.
> when the image briefly freezes during nor-
mal system adjustment.
BMW Night Vision's potential benefits
can be limited by the driving style of the
driver, the size and relative temperature of the
detected objects, dirt or contamination on the
camera lens, adverse weather like snow, rain or
fog, and other factors not mentioned here. It will
always be the driver's responsibility to drive at a
speed and in a manner that recognizes potential
hazards and adjust accordingly.
BMW Night Vision is not a substitute or replace-
ment for driver responsibility or for accommo-
dating the visibility conditions and the traffic sit-
uation. The forward view illuminated by the
headlamps must always be the basis for making
safe driving decisions, otherwise a safety risk
will result.<
Activating BMW Night Vision
1. Turn the light switch to position 2 or 3, refer
to page 100.
2. With low beams switched on:
> Press the button. Depending on the
vehicle's equipment, the location of the
button may differ somewhat.
> Press one of the programmable buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 54.
The image will be displayed on the Control Dis-
play after a few seconds. Depending on the last
mode selected, either the normal or full screen
image will be displayed.
Due to the system's need to adjust periodically,
a still image is displayed at certain intervals for
fractions of a second. This is normal and not an
indication of a problem.
To prevent driving without headlamps, at a
speed of more than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and
when dark, the thermal image on the Control
Display is only shown when the low beams are
on.
Deactivating BMW Night Vision
> Press the button.
> Press the button on the steering wheel.
> Press the button.
> Using iDrive", refer to Selecting settings.
Selecting settings
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Activate BMW Night Vision.
2. Press the controller to display the menu
items.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Select the menu item and press the control-
ler:
> "End Night Vision":
Deactivate BMW Night Vision.
> "Zoom":
At higher speeds, the image is zoomed
in.
> "Curve mode":
Depending on the steering angle and
other parameters, the image sections
follows the course of the road to some
degree.
> "Full screen":
The image is shown on the entire Con-
trol Display.
> "Contrast":
The contrast of the screen can be
adjusted.
> "Brightness":
The brightness of the screen can be
adjusted.
"Curve mode" can only be activated with
the "Zoom" function switched on. With
"Full screen" activated, "Curve mode" and
"Zoom" cannot be selected.<
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
To exit the menu:
The image will automatically disappear after
approx. 5 seconds.
Cleaning camera
The function of the camera may be affected by
heavy rain and fog, dirt, snow or ice on the lens.
When this occurs, the displayed image on the
Control Display may become gray.
To minimize icing, the camera lens is automati-
cally heated. However, it may be necessary to
clean the camera lens manually under severe
weather conditions. When doing so, cautiously
remove any debris, ice or snow. To avoid dam-
age to the lens, do not use sharp or abrasive
instruments to clean ice, snow, or dirt off the
lens.
When the windshield is cleaned with the head-
lamps on, the camera lens area is automatically
sprayed as well. Refer to page 65.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Lamps
100
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lights off and daytime running lamps
*
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
*
2 Low beams
3 Automatic headlamp control,
daytime run-
ning lamps
*
, Adaptive Head Light
*
and
high-beam assistant
*
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking. For lighting on one
side for parking as an additional feature, refer to
page 101.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long peri-
ods of time, as otherwise it may no longer be
possible to start the engine.<
Low beams
The low beams light up in switch position 2 only
with the engine running. Otherwise the parking
lamps are lit.
Automatic headlamp control
In the switch position 3, the system activates
the low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light condi-
tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head
Light
*
is active. The LED next to the symbol is
illuminated when the low beams are on.
When driving into a tunnel with bright overhead
lighting, switching on of the lights may be
delayed.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain on independent of
the ambient lighting conditions when you
switch on the fog lamps.<
If desired, the light switch can be left in the
position 3. The exterior lighting is automatically
switched off after switching off the vehicle.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
under these conditions.<
Pathway lighting
When you activate the headlamp flasher after
parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,
the low beams will come on for a brief period.
You can set the duration or deactivate the func-
tion via iDrive.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.
5. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
6. Turn the controller to select the desired
duration.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
Daytime running lamps*
If desired, the light switch can remain in posi-
tion 0, 1 or 3.
In position 0 and 3 the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off after the vehicle is
switched off. In position 1 the parking lamps
light up after the ignition is switched off.
Switch on the parking lamps if required as
described under Parking lamps.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
In switch position 3, the Adaptive Head Light is
active and the automatic headlamp control is
switched on, refer to page 100.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light is not active when driving in reverse
and points toward the passenger side when the
vehicle is stopped.
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-
lamp control flashes. The Adaptive Head Light
is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking. When using
this function, comply with national regulations.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever in the
desired direction 3, past the resistance point.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, as otherwise it may no
longer be possible to start the engine.<
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite
direction 3 up to the resistance point.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Lamps
102
High-beam assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off again. A sensor on the front of
the interior rearview mirror controls the pro-
cess. The assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit-
uation allows. This reduces the strain on you
while at the same time providing you with the
best possible visibility. Of course, you can inter-
vene at any time and switch the high beams on
and off in the accustomed manner.
Activating high-beam assistant
1. Turn the light switch to switch position 3,
refer to page 100.
2. Press the turn signal lever in the high beam
direction with the low beams switched on.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high-beam
assistant is activated. The assistant
automatically switches between high and low
beams, reacting to oncoming traffic and traffic
ahead and to well-lit areas such as towns and
cities.
Manually switching between high and
low beams
You can intervene at any time if you wish or the
situation requires.
> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the high beams, but you want to use the low
beams, simply switch to the low beams with
the turn signal lever. This also deactivates
the high-beam assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever in the high beam direction
again.
> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the low beams, but you want to use the high
beams, switch to the high beams in the
accustomed manner. The system is deacti-
vated in the process and you must switch to
the low beams manually.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever in the high beam direction
again.
> You use the headlamp flasher in the usual
way when the low beams are on.
System limits
The high-beam assistant cannot replace
personal decisions about the benefits of
using high beams. In situations that require
them, you should switch to the low beams man-
ually to avoid a safety risk.<
In the following sample situations, the system
either does not function or functions only in a
limited way and a personal reaction may be
required:
> Under extremely unfavorable weather con-
ditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation
> To make out poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, people on horseback,
horse-drawn vehicles, train or ship traffic
close to the road and wild animals crossing
the road
> In tight curves, on steep hilltops or in
depressions, with cross traffic or partially
concealed oncoming traffic on the freeway
> In poorly lit places and with highly reflective
signs
> In the low speed range
> When the windshield is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, decals, etc. in the
area of the interior rearview mirror
> When the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor
on the front side of the inside rearview mir-
ror with a cloth moistened with a small
amount of glass cleaner
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The
green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up when the fog lamps are switched on.
The fog lamps are switched off whenever the
high beams are switched on.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can control the lighting intensity by using
the knurled wheel.
Interior lamps
Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting, courtesy lamps
*
and sill
panel lighting
*
is automatic.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located
in the door handles to illuminate the exterior
area before the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-
utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 58.<
Switching interior lamps on and off
manually
Press button 1.
If you want the interior lamps to remain off con-
tinuously, maintain pressure on the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
To revert to normal operation, briefly press the
button.
Reading lamps
The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp:
You can turn them on and off using the but-
tons 2 located next to the lamps.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Climate
104
Climate
Automatic climate control
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air for the upper body area, refer to
Ventilation on page 107
3 Air to footwell
4 Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment
5 Maximum cooling
6 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
7 Air volume, manual
8 Switching off automatic climate control
9 Switching cooling function on and off
manually
10 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment
11 Residual heat mode
12 AUTO program
13 AUC automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated air mode
14 LED for parked car ventilation
15 Rear window defroster
16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The current setting for air distribution is dis-
played on the Control Display.
A congenial climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature that
you find pleasant.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 29.
AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air distribution to the
windshield and side windows, in
the direction of the upper body, and in the foot-
well, as well as the adjustment of the air volume.
It also adapts your instructions for the tempera-
ture to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-
densation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.
Intensity of AUTO program
To meet your individual needs, you can
increase or decrease the intensity of the auto-
matic climate control.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The marked intensity of the automatic
program is switched on.
Convertible program
When the convertible top is opened, the con-
vertible program can also be selected. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the convert-
ible top open. In addition, the air supply is
increased as the speed increases.
If the convertible program has been selected,
it is automatically active every time the top is
opened.
The effect of the convertible program can
be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector
is installed.<
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-
ble at any time of year, if necessary with the
maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
When switching between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to achieve the set temperature.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Climate
106
Adapting temperature in upper body
region
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select the field by moving the controller and
adjust the temperature by turning the con-
troller.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after a certain amount of time.
Convertible: the rear window defroster is only
activated when the rear window is closed.
Air volume, manual
You can adjust the air volume by
turning. You can reactivate the
automatic mode for the air volume
with the AUTO button.
Manual air distribution
You can specify the air distribution.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
The driver's and front passenger side can
be adjusted separately with the fields on the
right or left side.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if
necessary.
Move the controller to the right or left
repeatedly until the driver's side or front
passenger side is selected.
5. Select the desired field by moving the con-
troller.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Driver's side:
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Airflow for the upper body
3 Air to footwell
Front passenger side:
4 Airflow for the upper body
5 Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button raises and
lowers the air distribution settings on the
Control Display.<
Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as needed
according to the temperature setting. Depend-
ing on the weather, the windshield may fog over
briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati-
cally with the AUTO program. The passenger
compartment can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible from an outside
temperature above 327/ 06 and
with the engine running.
The automatic climate control changes over to
the lowest temperature and switches into the
recirculated-air mode. The maximum air quan-
tity only flows out of the vents for the upper
body. It is therefore necessary for these vents to
be open for maximum cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant
odors or pollutants in the immedi-
ate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The sys-
tem then recirculates the air currently within the
vehicle. In AUC mode, a sensor detects pollut-
ants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
Press the button repeatedly to run through the
following control sequence:
> LED off: outside air flows into the vehicle
continuously.
> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
responds by blocking the supply of outside
air when required.
> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is shut
off continuously.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
it off while also increasing the air volume as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over a longer period of time, as the air quality
inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously.<
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine
> engine at operating temperature
> sufficient battery voltage
> outside temperature below 777/256
The LED lights up when the function is
switched on.
With the ignition lock at radio readiness or
higher the interior temperature, the air volume
and the air distribution can be set.
Switching off automatic climate control
The air volume, the heater and the
cooling function are all switched
off.
You can restart the automatic cli-
mate control by pressing any of its buttons
except the REST button.
Ventilation
1 Knurled wheels for smoothly opening and
closing air vents
2 Levers for changing the airflow direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
vent outlets; otherwise, they could be cat-
apulted outwards and cause injuries.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Climate
108
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and is not directed straight at you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gas-
eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW
center replaces this combined filter as a stan-
dard part of your scheduled maintenance.
You can have more detailed information shown
on the Control Display, refer to page 77.
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem-
peratures.
It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from acti-
vating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between uses.
The air emerges through the upper body region
vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent
outlets must be open for the system to operate.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Switching on and off directly
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Preselecting activation times
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is highlighted.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next adjustment is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.
Activating timer
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con-
troller.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked car
ventilation has switched on.
The parked car ventilation is only avail-
able for activation within the subsequent
24 hours. After that, the time must be reacti-
vated.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
110
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control
replaces up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters for various items of radio-controlled
equipment such as door openers and house
alarm systems. The integrated universal remote
control registers and stores signals from the
original hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched
on, this programmed memory button 1 can be
used to operate the respective feature. The
LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the
signal.
If you sell your vehicle one day, delete the saved
programs beforehand for your own security,
refer to page 111.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the orig-
inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
If you have additional questions, please
contact your BMW center or call:
1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 58.
2. When using for the first time: press both
outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 sec-
onds until the LED 2 flashes. all stored pro-
grams are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 2 in/5 cm to 8 in/20 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the particular
system of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-
onds, alter the distance.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the system when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
If the device can not be used after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly for a short time
and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this
indicates that the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. In the case of
an alternating-code system, program the mem-
ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code
transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find informa-
tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-
tion.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled equipment.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in Fixed-code
hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
equipment to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<
Deleting stored programs
Press both outer buttons 1 for approx. 20 sec-
onds, maintaining pressure until the LED 2
starts to flash: all stored programs are deleted.
Programs cannot be deleted individually.
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button. The glove compartment
opens automatically and the lamps come on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold the cover up.
Rechargeable flashlight*
The flashlight is located on the left side of the
glove compartment.
The flashlight can remain there continuously.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
112
Remove the flashlight from the socket when
needed.
Be sure that the flashlight is switched off
when it is inserted into its socket. Failure
to comply with this precaution could lead to
overcharging and damage.<
Center armrest
A storage compartment is located in the arm-
rest between the front seats. This compartment
is integrated into the central locking system and
can also be locked separately using the hotel
function, refer to page 33.
To open the cover:
Pull the left button. The cover opens and can be
folded upward.
Depending on the version, the storage com-
partment can be equipped with a correspond-
ing cradle
*
for the telephone or mobile phone.
Adjusting height
The center armrest can be set in two positions.
Pull the right button:
Move the armrest upward or downward and
lock it in the desired position.
Storage compartments
Storage compartment behind center
armrest
To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge.
The compartment contains the cup holder
and
the lock for the hotel function, refer to page 33.
Other compartments and nets
Other compartments are provided in the doors
as well as in the front center console
*
.
Ticket pockets are located in the sun visors.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
front seats and in the passenger footwell
*
.
To prevent the risk of injury during an
accident, do not stow hard or sharp-
edged items in the nets.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
113
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Another storage space is located in the luggage
compartment in the right side panel. If you wish,
this is also suitable to store the onboard docu-
mentation.
Coupe: clothes hooks
To fold down, press at the top edge.
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
Cup holders
Do not place glass containers in the cup
holders. This would increase the risk of
injury in the event of an accident.<
The compartment of the rear center console
contains a built-in cup holder and a removable
one.
The removable cup holder can be inserted into
the side of the center console.
Ashtray
Opening
Press the trim strip of the cover.
Emptying
Press the opened cover beyond the resistance
point, refer to arrow: the ashtray lifts up for
removal.
Cigarette lighter
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
114
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical devices
Socket
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket by inserting plugs of different shapes or
sizes.
In front passenger footwell
Access to the socket:
Fold open the cover.
Ski bag*
It permits safe and clean transport of up to two
pairs of standard skies or one snowboard.
You can use the ski bag to stow skis up to 6.9 ft/
2.10 m long.
Loading
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
2. Extend the ski bag between the front seats.
The zipper gives you easy access to stowed
items and facilitates drying of the ski bag.
3. Press the button in the luggage compart-
ment.
4. Open the loading flap and use the magnetic
holder to secure it to the rear panel.
To stow the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges so that no damage occurs.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Controls
115
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. To do so, tighten the retaining belt at the
buckle.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could move around and endanger
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.
To refit the filler element, insert the two tabs at
the bottom into the strip and press the filler ele-
ment back into place. Make sure that you do not
damage the rear seat upholstery.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
118
Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in
Moving parts need time to adjust to one
another. To ensure that your vehicle continues
to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the follow-
ing section.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,
however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
Do not use the acceleration assistant during the
break-in period, refer to page 64.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch is only at its opti-
mized level after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if com-
ponents mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.
General driving notes
Closing luggage compartment lid
Only drive with the luggage compartment
lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust
can penetrate into the passenger compart-
ment.<
If special circumstances should make it abso-
lutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the
luggage compartment lid open:
1. Coupe: close both windows and the glass
sunroof.
Convertible: with closed top, close all win-
dows.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic
climate control to a high level, refer to
page 106.
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-
atures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving tips
119
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Mobile communications devices in
vehicle
BMW advises against using mobile com-
munications devices, e.g. mobile phones,
inside the vehicle without a direct connection to
an external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle
electronics and mobile communications device
can interfere with each other. In addition, there
is no assurance that the radiation emitted dur-
ing transmission will be conveyed out of the
vehicle interior.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Mini-
mum tire tread on page 191.
Driving through water
Do not drive through water on the road if it
is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at
walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Using handbrake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch; use the handbrake. Otherwise
greater clutch wear will result.<
SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by applying the throt-
tle, but engage the handbrake instead. Other-
wise overheating can occur in the transmission
region.<
Starting assistant
The starting assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is
not required for this purpose.
1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Release the footbrake and immediately
drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle
may also roll back slightly during this time. After
releasing the footbrake, immediately start
quickly; otherwise, the starting assistant no
longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds
and it begins to roll back.<
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation at the brake pedal combines with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits to indicate to
the driver that ABS is in its active mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions
When driving on wet roads or in heavy rain, it is
a good idea to apply light pressure to the brake
pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions
to ensure that this maneuver does not endan-
ger other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and thus reduced
efficiency of the brake system, downshift
to a gear in which only minimal brake applica-
tions are needed when descending long or
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
120
steep downhill stretches. Even light but consis-
tent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
The braking effect of the engine can be further
increased by downshifting, if necessary all the
way down into first gear. This strategy helps
you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake
system. For information on downshifting in the
manual mode of the automatic transmission,
refer to page 63.
Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in
idle or with the engine switched off, other-
wise there will be no engine braking action or
support of the braking force and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the automatic climate
control during operation, and then exits under
the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under
the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash
To prevent the exterior mirrors on this vehicle
from being damaged, always fold them in by
hand before entering an automatic car wash.
General information on the care and mainte-
nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring
for your vehicle brochure.
With comfort access and automatic
transmission
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in the selector
lever position N. Also refer to page 38.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*
:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg, otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged and unstable driving con-
ditions may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
800 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Driving tips
121
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
200 lbs.:
800lbs. minus 600lbs. = 200lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
bulkhead behind the rear seats.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
Securing cargo
> Use the luggage net
*
or securing straps to
hold down small and lightweight luggage
and cargo.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
*
for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes
mounted in the luggage compartment are
used to secure these heavy-duty cargo
straps, refer to arrows.
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Always position and secure the load as
described above. If you do not, it can
endanger the passengers during braking or
evasive maneuvers.
When fastening lashings, use only the lashing
eyes, refer to illustration; otherwise, the lash-
ings could come loose or you could damage the
vehicle.
Never exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 217, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also put you in violation
of freeway safety laws.
You should never transport heavy or hard
objects unsecured in the passenger compart-
ment, as they could fly around and pose a safety
hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt
braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Pad on bottom of luggage
compartment
You can use the pad as needed, for example to
transport soiled objects. The rubberized side is
washable and has an anti-skid effect.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Starting navigation system
124
Starting navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navi-
gation DVD. The latest version is available at
your BMW center.
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up. The DVD is automatically pulled in.
2. Wait several seconds for the system to scan
the data from the DVD.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos-
sible that it is jammed. A message appears on
the Control Display.
Display in the assistance
window
You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you switch to another application.
1. Move the controller to the right to enter the
assistance window.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
4. Press the controller.
*
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 128
> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 130
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 131
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 132
> Selecting home address, refer to page 134
After selecting your destination you can pro-
ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 136.
Operating navigation system
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always obey the traffic regu-
lations and road signs in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. If you do not observe this precaution,
you may be in violation of the law, and can
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 135. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Destination entry
126
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
The system also assists you with the following
features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries are being retained
for your new destination.
Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country and press the controller.
A list of available countries appears on the
display.
2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
In order to be able to start the destination guid-
ance, at least the town/city of the destination or
its zip code must be entered.
Entering destination via town/city
name
1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/
city and press the controller.
2. Select the first letter and press the control-
ler.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:
> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
> Delete all digits or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press the controller, holding it
down.
4. Enter additional letters if necessary.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> To enter blank space if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
5. Change to the third field from the top if nec-
essary. Turn the controller until the town or
city name is selected from the list and press
the controller.
Entering town/city of destination via
zip code
1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the individual digits and press the
controller.
> To enter a blank space:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To delete individual digits or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
> To delete all digits or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and hold the controller
down.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding town/city of destination
is displayed.
4. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in exactly the same
way as the destination town/city.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
Entering a street without entering
destination
You can also enter a street without entering a
destination. In this case all streets of the
entered country are offered for selection. The
related town/city is displayed after the street
name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered des-
tination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Destination entry
128
1. Change to upper field.
The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until the
request for the entry of a street in the coun-
try appears and press the controller.
3. Change to the second field from the top and
enter the street.
Entering house number
All house numbers stored for the street on the
navigation DVD can be entered.
1. Select "House number" and press the con-
troller.
2. Enter the house number:
Select the individual digits and press the
controller.
3. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the house number
is selected and press the controller.
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If destination guidance is not to be started
immediately:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, refer to page 131.
Entering destination via
voice*
In conjunction with the Professional navigation
system, you can enter the desired destination
via the voice input system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
speech input and iDrive at any time. Reactivate
the speech input function for this purpose if
necessary.
With {Options} you can have the system
read aloud the possible commands.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
2. {Enter address}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Selecting country
Say the name of the destination country in the
language of the voice input system.
Entering destination
To enter the destination, spell it using the cus-
tomary spelling of the destination country.
Say the letters smoothly and at normal volume,
avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 destina-
tions that match your entries. Up to 6
entries are displayed at once on the Control
Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the
destination.
To enter the house number:
Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Saving destination
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be saved in the address book.
Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town or
street of the destination, then you can input the
destination by using a map. You can use the
cursor to select the destination on the map and
then adopt it into the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Say country of destination.
1. Spell town/city name:
Say at least the first three letters of the
destination. The more letters you say,
the more exactly the system recognizes
the town/city.
A destination is suggested by the system.
2. Selecting location:
Select {Yes}
or
Other town/city:
{No}
Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
The following options are available:
{Next page}: additional entries of the
list are displayed.
{Repeat}: the town/city can be
respelled.
Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Destination entry
130
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
A section of a map is displayed on the Con-
trol Display:
> During destination guidance, centered
around the current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti-
vated, centered around the last destina-
tion entered
4. Select a destination with the cursor.
> Changing scale: turn the controller.
> Moving map: move the controller in the
corresponding direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forward, backward and also diago-
nally.
5. Press the controller to accept or store the
destination in the destination guidance sys-
tem.
The selected town/city of destination and
other menu items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places the cur-
rent position in the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination in the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for destination input can also be called
up from the map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
Selecting destination using
information
You can obtain a display of selected destina-
tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and adopt
them into the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. Select a location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
5. Press the controller.
6. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-
taurants", and press the controller.
These destinations are displayed on the
Control Display.
7. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
8. Select a menu item:
> To adopt the address into the destina-
tion list and start the destination guid-
ance:
Select "Select as destination" and press
the controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select "Call" and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the desti-
nation list are displayed. You can select these
destinations and adopt them into the destina-
tion guidance system.
For example, in order to plan a longer route, you
can store all of the destinations you wish to visit
in the destination list ahead of time, refer to
Entering a destination manually on page 125.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The last destination entered is the first item in
the destination list.
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion during destination guide.
To display other destinations in the destination
list:
Turn the controller.
Adopting the destination into the
destination guidance system
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
Editing the destination list
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> Saving entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> Displaying information on destination:
Select "Information on destination".
> Deleting entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> Deleting all entries:
Select "Delete list". Destination guid-
ance is switched off.
> Changing entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination via town/city name,
page 126.
3. Press the controller.
Address book
Opening address book
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con-
troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Enter names and addresses.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti-
nation list in the address book, refer to
page 131.
Storing current position*
The current position can be adopted into the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New address" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 125.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
You can also enter your current position in the
address book if you have left the sector covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
The stored entries are displayed on the
Control Display.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
To start destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
ler.
Changing destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 125.
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Destination entry
134
Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Delete data" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
6. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Storing home address
You can store your current position or the cur-
rent destination as a home address in the
address book. This entry is in the second posi-
tion in the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Home address" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address", or
"Save current destination" during the desti-
nation guidance, and press the controller.
To select the home address as the destination:
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
To change the entry:
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 125.
Selecting route
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like when
entering the destination and whenever the des-
tination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules,
taking the road type into account, e.g. whether
it involves freeways or winding roads. The road
types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a
result, the routes recommended by the naviga-
tion system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal expe-
rience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route preference"
is selected and press the controller.
The various criteria are listed on the Control
Display.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Freeways and major traffic arteries are
given priority.
> "Avoid highways"
Freeways are avoided where possible.
> "Fast route"
The short traveling time, being a combi-
nation of the shortest possible route and
the fastest roads
> "Short route"
Short route, regardless of how fast or
slow progress will be
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is highlighted.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-
terion and then press the controller:
> "Avoid tollroads"
Tollroads are avoided where possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided where possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
map view:
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
Word matching principle
The system supports the word matching princi-
ple to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns/cities. The system runs
ongoing checks, comparing your destination
entries with the data stored on the navigation
DVD as the basis for instant response. The user
benefits include:
> Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions, provided that the
spelling of the entry corresponds to a stan-
dard form used in another country.
Example:
Instead of "Munich", you can also enter the
German spelling "München" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets, the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough let-
ters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on the
navigation DVD. The system will not accept
nonexistent names and addresses.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Destination guidance
136
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
2. Select a destination from the destination list
and press the controller or enter a new des-
tination, refer to page 125.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-
play on the Control Display.
The destination guidance can also be started in
the arrow or map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment via iDrive at any time. You are
notified well in advance of a necessary change
of direction by spoken instructions and the dis-
play of the direction arrows.
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance
In arrow display or map view
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In destination list
This symbol marks the current destination.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
If the destination was not reached before the
end of the last trip, upon restarting you will
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
see the question:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
To start destination guidance immediately:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Route display
You have the option of displaying various views
of the route during destination guidance.
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
Displaying arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is
selected and press the controller.
The arrow display is displayed.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Selecting route criteria
3 Starting/stopping destination guidance
4 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current position
7 Direction of travel
> Hollow arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route.
> Solid arrow:
Arrow shows the route to be calculated
from a bird's eye view when the vehicle
is not located in an area contained on the
navigation DVD, e.g. in a multilevel park-
ing lot.
Depending on the equipment, the estimated
time of arrival and the distance to the destina-
tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the
Control Display.
Before a change of direction, the appearance of
the arrow changes.
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying map display
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Destination guidance
138
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired map
view is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Selecting destination using map
4 Showing/hiding information last selected,
refer to Selecting destination using infor-
mation on page 130
5 Changing map view
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
to the destination are shown in the bottom line
of the Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
have the option of deciding whether to orient
the map to north, toward your current direction
of travel, or show the map in perspective. At
scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map
always points toward north.
Changing map view
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map view is displayed.
Changing scale
Turn the controller to change the scale.
Displaying towns/cities and streets of
the route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled on each
individual road are also displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route list" is
selected and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any
time:
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"
is selected and press the controller.
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
5. Select "Navigation voice instructions on"
and press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use
*
.
Repeating and canceling voice
instructions
With the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel you can also make the following settings,
refer to page 54:
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Maintain pressure on the button for several
seconds.
Setting volume of voice instructions
The volume can only be adjusted during a voice
instruction.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if required.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Destination guidance
140
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Bypassing route sections
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New route" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying current position
You can also display your current position with
the destination guidance switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Current position"
is selected and press the controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis-
played on a map, refer to page 137.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
What to do if …
What to do if …
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but the
request to insert the DVD is displayed on
the Control Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the right
DVD for the navigation system. The DVD is
labeled accordingly.
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-
play?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your position is not yet avail-
able on your navigation DVD, or the system
is in the process of calculating your posi-
tion. As a rule, reception is guaranteed in
the open air.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a
destination that is as close as possible to
the original.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station etc., then start
the destination guidance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des-
tination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any let-
ters to choose from. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersec-
tions?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery has just been reconnected
after having been disconnected, it then
takes up to 10 minutes before the system is
once again operational.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Entertainment
This chapter describes the operation
of the radio and CD player as well as
their tone settings.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
On/off and tone
144
On/off and tone
The following audio sources have shared con-
trols and setting options:
> Professional
*
radio or
Business radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
Buttons near CD player
The layout of the buttons can vary depending
on your vehicle's equipment.
Single drive:
Two drives:
1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on, the last set radio
station or CD track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and
CD changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVDs
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "WB": Weather Band station
> "SAT": satellite radio
> "CD": CD player or CD changer
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, store station, tone control, sam-
ple stations.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items
page 18.<
The selected audio source is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off
To switch the Entertainment sound output on/
off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi-
cates that sound output is switched off.
For a single drive, the sound output is available
for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition
switched off.
To do so, switch the sound output on again.
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the
desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass, or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The sound settings are globally adjusted for all
audio sources.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected when
you have opened "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the
controller.
Treble and bass
1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
On/off and tone
146
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control auto-
matically increases the volume with increasing
speed. You can set various stages for the
increase in volume.
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Turn controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
To switch off spatial sound:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges:
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Radio
148
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Listening to radio
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn
controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g.
"Presets".
If "Autostore" does not display any stations or
if the stations displayed can no longer be
received, to update the station with the stron-
gest signal, refer to page 149.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
Professional* radio
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have stored, refer to page 150.
Business radio
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest signal, refer
to page 149.
> "Presets":
Stations you have stored, refer to page 150.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Changing selection criteria
1. Change into the second field from the top.
2. Turn the controller until the desired selec-
tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
Buttons next to CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next displayed sta-
tion.
You can also change stations with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Sampling stations, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the stations on the current wave-
band.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the stations, and the
radio remains on the current station.
Buttons next to CD player
To sample the stations, press and hold
the button for the corresponding direction.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that are
received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-
quency.
Updating stations with best reception
For Professional radio with "AM" and with Busi-
ness radio:
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Radio
150
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.
Storing stations
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired selec-
tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory position is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
The channels of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Changing a memory position
1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory position is selected.
The number of the memory position
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
RDS Radio Data System
RDS transmits additional information in the FM
frequency range. If the reception conditions are
good, the station names are shown on the Con-
trol Display. If the reception is weak or dis-
rupted, it can take some time before the station
names are displayed.
Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
Automatically sorting
stations*
For the "All stations" selection criterion, you
can set whether the most frequently used sta-
tions are displayed at the beginning.
1. Select "All stations" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.
The most frequently used stations are
shown at the beginning.
Weather news flashes*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to
3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most
stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a
storm, the National Weather Service interrupts
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Radio
152
the routine weather news and transmits special
warning messages instead. If you have a ques-
tion about NOAA Weather Radio, please con-
tact the nearest office of the National Weather
Service. Details are also provided on the Inter-
net at www.nws.noaa.gov.
Calling up weather news flashes
1. Select "WB" and press the controller.
2. Select a station.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit both analog and digital
signals. You can receive these stations digitally
and in improved sound quality.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.
4. Select "HD radio" and press the controller.
5. Select "Off" and press the controller.
The reception of digital stations is deac-
tivated.
This symbol is displayed when a sender is
being received digitally.
With some stations the digital signals are not
transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig-
nals. If you are in an area in which the selected
station is not continuously received digitally,
playback switches between analog and digital
reception. This can result in repetitions or inter-
ruptions. In this case it may be advisable to
deactivate digital radio reception.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Updating stations offering digital
reception
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-
troller.
The display of the stations offering digital
reception is updated. This can take up to
2minutes.
Displaying additional information
With the digital stations, additional information
on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
If a digital station is received again when the
station is changed, the additional information
will be displayed again following a brief interrup-
tion.
Satellite radio*
You can receive up to 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Radio
154
Enabling or disabling channels
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required for enabling or disabling.<
2. To enable the channels:
Dial phone number.
Disabling
1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-
played.
The electronic serial number is
required to disable.<
3. To have the channels disabled:
Dial phone number.
Selecting and storing channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels are shown on the Control Display
sorted on the basis of selection criteria.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you have stored
previously.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
> "Categories":
All channels sorted by category, e.g.
news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym-
bol.
6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Play" and press the controller.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
1 Artist
2 Track
Storing channel
1. Select the desired channel.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Radio
156
4. Turn the controller to select a memory posi-
tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The stations of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Changing channel with buttons next to
CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
If no signal can be received for more than
4 seconds, a message is displayed on the Con-
trol Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files*
CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3,
can be played by the CD player, but not by the
CD changer.
CD player: starting CD
Equipment with two drives:
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up. The CD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the
data depending on the directory structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
4. On vehicles with a CD changer, change to
the second field from the top and turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
The CD player is started.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is switched on.
To eject the CD, press the button on the
CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.
CD changer: starting CD
1. Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to
page 161.
2. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
3. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
*
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
158
5. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until the
desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press
the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.
If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga-
zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g.
CD 1, track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.
Selecting a track
Buttons next to CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
The CD will start to play at the start of the track.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change the track with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Select a track by turning the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the directory if necessary and press
the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
3. Select "Play" and press the controller.
To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying information on track*
With compressed audio files, you can display
possibly included information about the current
track, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information about the current track is dis-
played.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Sampling tracks, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the tracks on the current CD.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the
player remains on the current track.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all tracks of the current direc-
tory, select "Scan directory" and press
the controller.
> To sample all tracks of the CD, select
"Scan all" and press the controller.
To end scan search:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
This cancels the scan search and the player
remains on the current track.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
160
Repeating track
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
To cancel repeat mode:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all tracks of the current direc-
tory, select "Repeat directory" and press
the controller.
To cancel repeat mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play sequence
In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are
played once in a random sequence.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To cancel random mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all tracks of the current directory
in random order, select "Random direc-
tory" and press the controller.
> To play all tracks of the CD in random
order, select "Random all" and press the
controller.
To cancel random mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons next to CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.
Removing CD magazine
To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or
remove them from it, you must first remove the
magazine from the CD changer:
Press button 2 to eject the CD magazine 1.
Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the
magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be
read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs into/from
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs, remember to
hold them only by their edges, taking care to
avoid touching the reflective CD memory sur-
face.
To insert:
Insert one CD into each compartment of the
magazine with the labeled side up.
To remove:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.
Inserting CD magazine
Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in
the direction of the arrow.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
inserted CDs and is then ready for operation.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
162
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs with adhesive
labels as these can come loose during playback
due to heat build-up and cause irreparable
damage to the system.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may no
longer be ejected.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or advanced age of the CD/DVD blank.
Label CDs/DVDs only on the top, using a marker
designed for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid fingerprints dust, scratches, and mois-
ture.
Keep CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/50 6, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
Manufacturers often provide CDs/DVDs with
copy protection. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
Care
If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side
of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available
cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from
the center outward.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate
your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control
and how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.
Communications
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Telephoning
166
Telephoning
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After a suitable mobile
phone has been logged onto the vehicle once,
you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive,
with the buttons on the steering wheel and by
voice.
A mobile phone that has been logged on once is
automatically detected again as soon as it is
brought back inside the vehicle, provided that
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on. The logon data of up to four mobile phones
can be stored simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected simultaneously, the most
recently logged-on mobile phone can be oper-
ated via the vehicle.
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-
nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen-
ter which mobile phones will fit in the snap-in
adapters they offer.
BMW discourages the use of mobile
phones or other mobile communications
devices inside the vehicle without a direct con-
nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
device can interfere with each other. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation that
results from transmission will be dissipated
from the vehicle interior.<
A mobile phone detected by the vehicle should
not be operated by the mobile phone's keypad;
otherwise malfunctions may occur.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the handsfree system instead. If you do not
observe this precaution, your being distracted
can endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Ask your BMW center which mobile phones
with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the
mobile phone preparation package or which
mobile phones will fit in the snap-in adapters
they offer. These mobile phones support the
functions described in this Owner's Manual,
provided they are running a certain software
version. Malfunctions can occur with other
mobile phones.
Care instructions
You can find what you need to know about car-
ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring
for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile
phone operating instructions.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone
*
using:
> The steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands, refer to page 174
*
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
167
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Making calls with car phone:
BMW Assist calls
You can use the car phone via the handsfree
system for BMW Assist calls.
When the status information "BMW Assist" or
"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica-
tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a con-
nection is being established to BMW Assist
or while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must unpair the
mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.
Initial operation
Logging on mobile phone on vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth links of the vehicle, refer to
page 169, and the mobile phone are active.
> Depending on the mobile phone, presets in
the mobile phone are required: e.g. acti-
vated via the menu item Bluetooth or the
menu item Connection not with confirma-
tion.
> To log on, specify any desired number as
the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-
tooth passkey is no longer required follow-
ing successful logon.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only log on the mobile phone with the
vehicle stopped; otherwise you may
become distracted and inadvertently endanger
your passengers and other road users.<
Switching on ignition
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on the switch on ignition by pressing
the Start/Stop button without depressing
the brake or clutch pedal.
Preparation with iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
Preparation with mobile phone
6. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instruc-
tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con-
nect or link under Bluetooth device.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Telephoning
168
Logging on
Depending on your mobile phone, first, the dis-
play of your mobile phone and then the Control
Display will ask you to enter the Bluetooth pass-
key you specified.
Display on the Control Display if the Bluetooth
passkey can be entered with iDrive:
7. Select "Add device" and press the control-
ler.
8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.
9. Select "Confirm passkey" and press the
controller.
10. Wait a few seconds until the list of the
logged-on mobile phones is shown on the
Control Display and "Phone" is selected.
To cancel the logon of the mobile phone on the
vehicle:
Select "Refuse connection" and press the con-
troller.
The next time you use the mobile phone in the
vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max-
imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are trans-
ferred to your vehicle, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone if necessary.
This transfer depends on your mobile phone,
refer to the operating instructions of your
mobile phone if necessary, and can take several
minutes.
Up to four mobile phones can be logged on
consecutively. If you log on a fifth mobile phone,
the logon data of the last mobile phone in the
list will be deleted, refer to below.
List of logged-on mobile phones
All mobile phones for which the vehicle has
stored the logon data can be displayed. If sev-
eral logged-on mobile phones are detected by
the vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the
mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi-
cle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected
in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper-
ated via the vehicle.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
169
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-
troller.
The selected mobile phone is move upward
by one position.
Logging mobile phone off vehicle
If you no longer want to operate your mobile
phone via the vehicle, you can delete the logon
data of the mobile phone.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.
7. Select "Delete device" and press the con-
troller.
The logged-off mobile phone is deleted
from the list.
The phone book entries you have trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to your vehi-
cle are also deleted in the process.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily disconnect the Blue-
tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.<
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
the mobile phone can use other devices with a
Bluetooth interface, e.g. a laptop computer.
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between your vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Remove the mobile phone from the snap-in
adapter and switch it off.
2. Press the button to open the start
menu.
3. Select the menu and press the controller.
4. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
6. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
the Bluetooth link is activated.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Telephoning
170
7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deac-
tivate the link.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the handsfree system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
> Dial phone numbers.
> Dial phone numbers from the phone book.
> Dial stored phone numbers, e.g. from the
list of accepted calls.
> Hang up.
With the ignition and radio readiness switched
off, e.g. after removing the remote control, you
can continue an ongoing call for a maximum of
25 minutes via the handsfree system.
Requirements
The logon data of the mobile phone are stored
in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to
operate.
The engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
The mobile phone is detected by the vehicle.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to open "Com-
munication".
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Select "Accept" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
171
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing
the individual digits and pressing the con-
troller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the digits on the
keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete an incorrect character:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Ending a call
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
2. Select "End call" and press the controller.
Dialing a phone number from phone
book or a phone number stored in a list
Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls
and the entries of the phone book are stored in
lists when the mobile phone is connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in
the phone book, the name of the entry is dis-
played instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries of the mobile-phone phone
book, consisting of the name and phone
number, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8"
The eight numbers called most frequently
from the phone book "A - Z" are automati-
cally stored in the Top 8 list. The list is
sorted according to frequency.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Telephoning
172
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
which were not accepted are stored. This
requires the telephone number of the caller
to have been sent.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
sent.
Dialing phone numbers from phone
book
The list "A - Z" is available for you phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the first letter of the desired entry and
press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Dialing phone numbers stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
173
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
Deleting individual entries
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.
Deleting entire list
1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.
3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the
controller.
The list is deleted.
BMW Contact*
If you are not activated for BMW Assist, you can
display several service phone numbers:
> Roadside Assistance
*
of the BMW Group
when you require breakdown assistance
> BMW center, e.g. when you want to make
an appointment for service
> BMW Hotline
*
for information on all
aspects of your vehicle
If BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 180.
You can select the displayed service phone
number if your mobile phone is logged on in the
vehicle:
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact is established.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Telephoning
174
Transferring phone number via tone
dialing method
The tone dialing method is required for access
to network services or for controlling devices,
e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.
This function is available when a connection
has been established.
1. Establish connection.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Keypad" and press the controller.
4. Select the desired character
and press the
controller.
Each character is sent immediately and
confirmed by a tone depending the mobile
phone model.
Changing between mobile
phone and handsfree system
From mobile phone to handsfree
system
You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-
tooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree sys-
tem when the motor is running or the ignition is
switched on. Depending on your mobile phone,
the system automatically switches over to the
handsfree mode.
For mobile phones that do not automatically
switch over to the handsfree mode:
> You may also be able to continue the con-
versation via the handsfree system,
depending on the mobile phone used. Fol-
low the instructions displayed on the mobile
phone display, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone.
> Press the button above the storage
compartment. Switching over may take
several seconds.
From handsfree system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the handsfree system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Follow the instructions displayed
on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of your mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
assisted by announcements and questions in
many cases.
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 170.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
175
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Voice commands
Activating system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
The text or numbers that the voice com-
mand system has registered will appear on
the Control Display.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command,
e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the
button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands at any point:
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting volume
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the button during an instruction to select
the desired volume.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
{Cancel}.
{Help}
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Command Response
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Telephoning
176
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
Correcting phone number
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting input
{Delete} is used to delete all the digits entered
so far.
Voice phone book
Operating by voice command requires a per-
sonal voice phone book.
> On vehicles with separate drives for audio
CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries are
automatically adopted from your mobile
phone's memory.
> On vehicles with a single drive, the entries
must be entered by voice and are indepen-
dent of your mobile phone's memory. In this
case, it is not possible to use voice com-
mand either to call phone numbers stored in
the mobile phone or to store new numbers.
Creating and editing voice phone
book*
Save entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
Have entries read aloud and dial:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
1. {Dial number}.
The dialog for establishing a telephone
connection is opened.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
The connection to the desired sub-
scriber is established.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
1. {Save name}.
The dialog for storing a name is
opened.
2. Speak name and repeat entry upon
request.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2seconds.
3. Say the phone number when prompted.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the repeated prompt with
{Yes}.
1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is
read aloud.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
177
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".
Notes
The commands in English were available
as of this printing. Other languages are
currently not available. To operate the mobile
phone via the voice command system, refer to
page 22.<
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at nor-
mal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis
and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from ambi-
ent noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Mounting/removing snap-in
adapter
1. Press the area 1 around the button and
remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and
press down until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press the area 1 around the button.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Telephoning
178
Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With the keys facing upward, press the
mobile phone toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged with the
ignition lock at radio readiness or higher or with
the steering unlocked.
To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid
using the phone when the ignition is
switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press button.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
TeleService , BMW Assist
TeleService
TeleService assists you when communicating
with a BMW center. The built-in car phone can
be used to transmit data regarding the service
status of your vehicle or regarding legally man-
dated inspections directly to your BMW center.
This is the same data that is also stored in the
remote control for CBS Condition Based Ser-
vice. Your BMW center can then contact you,
and you can make an appointment that suits
you while you are still on the road. Your advan-
tage here is that your BMW center can prepare
in advance for the required maintenance work.
The TeleService functions are country-specific:
the data regarding the service status of your
vehicle or regarding legally mandated inspec-
tions is transmitted on a country-specific basis
either automatically before they fall due or dur-
ing your calls to the BMW center. Your BMW
center will be glad to provide more detailed
information.
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with other services in
addition to TeleService. For example, the posi-
tion data of your vehicle can be transferred to
the BMW Assist response center if an emer-
gency call
*
has been initiated.
Many functions of BMW Assist depend on the
individually agreed contract. Data transmission,
e.g. of the CBS Condition Based Service, dif-
fers from country to country.
The contract of participation with BMW Assist
and the activation must be completed before
you can use BMW Assist.
When the contract expires, the car phone can
be deactivated by a BMW center without your
having to visit a BMW center. Following deacti-
vation of the car phone, no emergency calls can
be made. The car phone can be reactivated
after signing a new contract with a BMW center.
You can also use the services of BMW Assist via
the Internet. The range of services is continually
being expanded.
Requirements
You can use TeleService or BMW Assist when
the following requirements are met:
> The installed car phone is logged on to a
cellular telephone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
This can be displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
> For TeleService or BMW Assist to be acti-
vated and updated, the GPS signal must be
available.
> For BMW Assist: you have applied to your
BMW center or BMW Customer Support for
BMW Assist.
Enabling TeleService or BMW Assist
For you to be able to use the services of
TeleService or BMW Assist, these must be
enabled.
Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current location. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave radio readiness switched on while
connecting to the system.
Enabling
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
**
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
TeleService, BMW Assist
180
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-
troller.
TeleService and, if applicable, BMW Assist
are enabled; data exchange with the service
center starts.
Enabling takes a few minutes. The status is dis-
played on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the enable process continues to
run in the background.
Services offered
The following special features apply for the ser-
vices of TeleService and BMW Assist:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transferred can be the vehicle
data, your current position or the data of the
CBS Condition Based Service.
Automatic service notification*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on legally mandated inspections is transmitted
automatically directly to your BMW center prior
to the due date. You can check when the BMW
center was notified.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
5. Select "Service notification" and press the
controller.
Breakdown assistance
You can call Roadside Assistance
*
of the
BMW Group should you require help in the
event of a breakdown.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Select "BMW Assist" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "BMW Service" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.
If the current position can be determined,
the current vehicle location is displayed.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
Contact with Roadside Assistance will be
established.
Establishing contact with your BMW
center or BMW Customer Relations
You can contact your BMW center, e.g. to
arrange a service appointment.
For information related to your vehicle, call the
BMW Customer Relations.
This requires your mobile phone to be logged
onto the vehicle.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
TeleService, BMW Assist
182
5. Select desired BMW service:
> "Service Request"
> "Customer Relations"
6. Press the controller.
7. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
Contact with the desired BMW service will be
established.
Adapting TeleService or
BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
If the offering from TeleService or BMW Assist
changes, you will be notified. In this case you
should update the services.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-
troller.
The current services available from
TeleService or BMW Assist are displayed.
6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Blocking services*
If you block the services, the connection to
BMW Assist is deactivated.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Terminate services" and press the
controller.
The use of TeleService or BMW Assist is
blocked, and the current vehicle position will
not be transferred during an emergency call
*
.
To deactivate the blocking function, enabling
must be carried out again, refer to page 179.
This does not affect the contractual agree-
ments.
Re-enable TeleService and, if applicable,
BMW Assist to log on again.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Displaying vehicle data
When TeleService or BMW Assist is activated,
the license plate and the vehicle identification
number of your vehicle can be displayed.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Profile" and press the controller.
To adjust the license plate number, please con-
tact your BMW center.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance
and breakdown assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Refueling
186
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling, otherwise no fuel can be filled into
the tank and a message is displayed.<
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and
regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con-
tainers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause
an explosion or a fire in an accident.<
Fuel filler door
To open and close: briefly press the rear edge of
the fuel filler door.
Manual release
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
release the fuel filler door manually:
In the luggage compartment, pull the knob with
the gas pump symbol on the right side panel.
Observe following when refueling
When handling fuels always follow any
safety guidelines posted at the gas sta-
tion.<
Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler door.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling, as otherwise this
> results in premature pump shutoff
> can lead to reduced efficiency in the fuel-
vapor recovery system
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 18.5 gallons/70 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 gallons/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel filler cap
Closing
Insert the cap and turn it clockwise until there is
a clearly audible click.
Do not jam the strap attached to the fuel
filler cap between the fuel filler cap and
the vehicle. A message
*
is displayed if the cap
is loose or missing.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
187
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Fuel specifications
Never used leaded gasoline; it will perma-
nently damage the catalytic converter.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI rating is 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no affect on the engine life.
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has demonstrated significant
differences in fuel quality: volatility, composi-
tion, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for
sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels
containing up to and including 10% ethanol or
other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by
weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will
not void the applicable warranties with respect
to defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
problems relating to drivability and start-
ing, and to a tendency to stall, especially under
certain environmental conditions such as high
ambient temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
188
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-
fort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. Otherwise
driving instability or tire damage, and therefore
accidents, can result from incorrect tire inflation
pressures.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 88, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 90.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-
ing:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving
comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.
The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire dam-
age and accidents may result.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
note the tire pressures for speeds exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column
of the table on the following pages and adjust
your tire inflation pressures as needed. Other-
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
189
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire inflation pressures for the 650i
Coupe
Tire inflation pressures for the 650i Convertible
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 96 V M+S
245/50 R 17 99 H M+S
30/210 33/230 30/210 33/230 33/230 39/270
Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W
Rear: 275/40R1899W
30/210 33/230 30/210 33/230 33/230 39/270
Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W
Rear: 275/35R1996W
30/210 33/230 30/210 33/230 33/230 39/270
Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W
Rear: 275/30R2093Y
30/210 33/230 30/210 33/230 33/230 39/270
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 217.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 96 V M+S
245/50 R 17 99 H M+S
32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W
Rear: 275/40R1899W
32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W
Rear: 275/35R1996W
32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W
Rear: 275/30R2093Y
32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 217.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
190
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The tire's date of manufacture is indicated on
the sidewall:
DOT ... 0806 indicates that a tire was manufac-
tured in week 8 of the year 2006.
BMW recommends replacing all tires at least
every 6 years, even if some tires may last for
10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half, 1γ, times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and dif-
ferences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Belted construction – radial
Rim diameter in inches
Carrying capacity ID-code
(not in ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in ZR tires before the R)
245/45 R 18 96 W
e.g.
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0806
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
191
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 192.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and foreign objects lodged in
the tread, and check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm, there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for
winter use below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm.
New tires should be mounted in the interest of
safety.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer
to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum-
ference and are marked on the side of the tire
with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread
has been driven down to the wear indicators, a
tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been
reached.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazards and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases reduce your speed imme-
diately and have the wheels and tires
inspected immediately. To do this, carefully
drive to the nearest BMW center or a special-
ized tire dealer that works in accordance with
BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained
personnel. Have the vehicle towed to the repair
shop if necessary. Tire damage can be
extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
192
Run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire.
Run-flat tires consist of self-contained tires and
special rims. The sidewall reinforcement
ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and driving
remains possible to a restricted degree.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire page 89
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-
sage with low tire inflation pressure page 91
New wheels and tires
Only have new wheels and tires mounted
by a BMW center or a repair shop that
works in accordance with BMW guidelines and
uses appropriately trained personnel. If this
work is performed inexpertly, there is a danger
of damage and associated safety risks. Make
sure that the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend the use of
retreaded tires; otherwise, driving safety
may be reduced. Potentially substantial varia-
tions in the design and the age of the carcasses
can result in a reduced service life.<
The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
You can find out the right wheel-tire combina-
tion from your BMW center.
The right wheel-and-tire combination is
another vital factor in ensuring reliable opera-
tion of various vehicle systems such as ABS
and DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread config-
uration from a single manufacturer. After a tire is
damaged, always remember to have the original
wheel and tire combination remounted on the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or converting from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, as otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 89. Your BMW center will be
happy to advise you on this subject.
Recommended tire brands
BMW recommends particular tire brands for
each tire size. You can recognize these from the
clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
193
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling characteris-
tics.
Run-flat tires
When installing new tires or when changing
from summer tires to winter tires, for your own
safety, use run-flat tires. No spare wheel is pro-
vided in the event of a flat. Your BMW center will
be glad to advise you.
For safety reasons, BMW recommends
that you do not have damaged run-flat
tires repaired; they should be replaced.<
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Watch speed
Always observe the maximum permissi-
ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-
dents.<
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum
tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall
of the tire.
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Consult your BMW center for more infor-
mation.
These snow chains are approved exclusively for
use in pairs on the rear wheels with the tire size:
> 245/50 R 17 Y
> 245/45 R 18 Y
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
installing snow chains as this could cause
the Flat Tire Monitor to malfunction.
When driving with snow chains, it may be prac-
tical to briefly activate DTC, refer to page 87.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Under the hood
194
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you are unfamiliar with the specifications to be
observed, only have work carried out on your
vehicle by a BMW center or a repair shop that
works in accordance with BMW guidelines and
uses appropriately trained personnel. Other-
wise there is a danger of damage and associ-
ated safety risks if this work is performed
improperly.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not com-
pletely closed while you are driving your vehicle,
you should stop at once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
195
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Engine compartment
1 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to
Adding engine oil
2 Brake fluid reservoir, located beneath the
microfilter cover, refer to page 197
3 Jump-starting terminal, refer to page 207
4 Washer fluid reservoir of the headlamp and
windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 66
5 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 197
Engine oil
Engine oil consumption depends on driving
style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.
The condition for the most accurate indication
of the oil level possible is measurement with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. following
an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.
You can display the oil level on the Control Dis-
play while driving or when stopped on a level
surface with the engine running.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Under the hood
196
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine
oil level" is selected and press the control-
ler. The oil level is displayed.
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measured value available: Updating
engine oil level measurement...":
Engine oil level is being measured. This
process can take approx. 3 minutes when
stopped on a level surface and approx.
5 minutes while driving.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
of engine oil.":
Add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil at the next
opportunity.
> "Engine oil level too high":
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately; otherwise, engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
> "Please observe recalculated service inter-
val for engine oil":
Do not add engine oil. Continued driving is
possible. To do this, observe the recalcu-
lated remaining mileage until the next oil
change service, refer to page 199. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of oil until a corre-
sponding message is shown on the Control Dis-
play.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas
of skin with soap and water after such work.
Keep oil, grease, etc. out of reach of children
and heed warnings on containers. Failure to do
so could pose health risks.<
Oil change
Have oil changes carried out only by a BMW
center or a repair shop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel.
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Use only approved BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is
unavailable, you can add small quantities of
other synthetic oils between oil changes. Use
only oils of the specification API SH or higher.
Your BMW center will be happy to answer
detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-
mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
197
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Do not use oil additives; under some cir-
cumstances, they can harm your
engine.<
Viscosity grades
The viscosity is a measure of the thickness of
the oil and is specified in SAE grades.
The choice of the right SAE grade is based on
the climatic conditions in the region in which
you normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the SAE grades
5W-40 and 5W-30.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.
Coolant
Do not open the cooling system when the
engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause
burns.<
Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard.<
Always observe all applicable environ-
mental laws and regulations when dis-
posing of used coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. The engine must be at ambient tempera-
ture.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-
clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-
sure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when it lies
between the Min and Max mark, also refer to
the drawing next the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level – do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until it clicks.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Brake system
Malfunction
Brake fluid
The warning lamp lights red up in spite
of the handbrake being released; a
message is shown on the Control Dis-
play: stop the vehicle immediately.
The brake fluid in the reservoir has fallen to
below the minimum level. At the same time, a
significantly longer brake pedal path may be
noticeable. Have the system checked immedi-
ately by a BMW center.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Under the hood
198
When you continue driving, an increased
brake pedal path can be necessary, and
significantly longer braking distances may be
required. Please adapt your driving style
accordingly.<
Brake pads
The warning lamp lights red up in spite
of the handbrake being released; a
message is shown on the Control Dis-
play:
The brake pads have reached their minimum
pad thickness. Have the brake pads replaced as
soon as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
For your own safety: use only brake pads
that BMW has approved for your particu-
lar vehicle model. As BMW cannot assess the
suitability of other brake pads for use on your
vehicle, BMW is unable to assume continued
responsibility for the vehicle's operating safety
if non-approved pads are installed.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
199
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, you will find that a complete dealer
service history is an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 77:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
> Brake fluid
> Spark plugs
> Vehicle check
> Legally required tests depending on local
regulations
Service data in remote control
Your vehicle stores the information required
maintenance continuously in the remote con-
trol during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehi-
cle. For this reason, when you take your vehicle
in for service, you should give the BMW Service
Advisor the remote control last used to drive it.
Make sure the date is always set cor-
rectly, refer to page 83, as otherwise the
effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service
is not ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Maintenance
200
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.
This socket is located under a cover on the left
side of the driver's footwell, directly under the
dashboard.
Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up. The
exhaust-gas values are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case, you should reduce speed and drive to
the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.
Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage
to the emission-relevant components, espe-
cially the catalytic converter, within a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-
ened, the OBD system can detect the
escape of fuel vapor. This causes a display to
light up. If the cap is then tightened, the display
should go out within a few days.<
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a
device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also sub-
scribed to a BMW Assist plan, then certain vehi-
cle data can be transmitted or recorded to
enable corresponding services.
Care
Important information on care and maintenance
of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your
vehicle brochure.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
201
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
The onboard tool kit is located in the luggage
compartment under the floor mat.
Wiper blade replacement
1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp it firmly.
2. Press the locking tabs together while slid-
ing the wiper blade toward the front to dis-
engage it.
3. Insert the new wiper blade and slide it in
until it audibly clicks into place.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to driving safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. If you are not familiar with the
specified procedures, have the corresponding
work carried out at your BMW center.
Never touch the glass on new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A selection of replacement bulbs is available at
your BMW center.
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the electrical
devices involved to prevent short circuits from
occurring. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, follow any
instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
When performing maintenance on the head-
lamps, follow the instructions in the separate
Caring for your vehicle brochure.
For bulbs for which changing is not
described, and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
Xenon lamps
The service life of these lamps is very long and
the probability of a failure is very low, provided
that they are not switched on and off an unusual
number of times. If one of these bulbs should
nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driv-
ing with great caution using the fog lamps, pro-
vided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit
this.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Replacing components
202
Have work on the Xenon lighting system
performed only by your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage involved, there
is a danger to life and limb when work is carried
out improperly.<
High beams, parking lamps
The illustration shows the front left side of the
engine compartment.
High beams
Bulb 55 watts, H 7
1. Remove the cover cap 1 by pressing the tab
and removing the cover cap upward.
2. Press the bulb holder from above to release
it.
3. Remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove and replace the bulb.
The lamp H7 is pressurized; wear eye
protection and protective gloves. Other-
wise there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is
accidentally damaged during replacement.<
Parking lamps
Bulb 10 watts
Bulb holder and reflector are one unit and
are replaced together.<
1. Turn the bulb holder 2 to the right and
remove.
2. Press the snap connection on the plug con-
nector, pull off the bulb holder and replace.
Front turn signal, side marker
Your BMW is equipped with two turn signal
lamps per side in the front.
Turn signal lamp 1
Bulb 21 watts, WY 21 SV
The illustration shows the front right side of the
engine compartment.
1. Press the lever shown:
> downward for the right turn signal
> upward for the left turn signal
2. Remove the bulb holder towards the rear.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Turn signal lamp 2
Bulb 21 watts, WY 21 SV
The bulb for the turn signal lamp 2 can be
replaced via the wheel well.
The illustration shows the front left side of the
vehicle.
1. Turn the steering all the way to be able to
remove the cover, refer to illustration.
2. Turn off the light, switch off the ignition and
remove the remote control from the ignition
lock.
3. Unscrew the two bolts using the open-end
wrench from the onboard tool kit, refer to
page 201.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
203
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
4. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove,
refer to arrow.
5. Remove and replace the bulb.
Side markers
Bulb 5 watts, WY5W ST
The bulb can be replaced via a cover at the front
of the wheel well, refer to the description for
turn signal lamp 2.
1. The bulb holder of the sidemarker lamp is
located toward the outside of the vehicle
next to the bulb holder of turn signal lamp 2.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Side turn signals
Bulb 5 watts, WY 5 W
1. Press against the front edge of the lamp
with the tip of your finger, then push it to the
rear, release the snap connection at the
front and take it off the trim strip.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and
remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Tail lamps
The roadside parking, rear and brake
lamps are LEDs. The backup lamps are
equipped with long-life bulbs. Please contact a
BMW center in case of a malfunction.<
1 Turn signals
2 Roadside parking, rear and brake lamp
3 Backup lamp
4 Reflector
Rear turn signals
Bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W
The illustration shows the recess on the left
side of the luggage compartment.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Unclip the bulb holder and remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Replacing components
204
License plate lamps
Bulb 5 watts, WY 5 W
1. Push a screwdriver from the left under the
lamp and pry out the lamp toward the right.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and
remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as a
standard feature. An immediate wheel change
in the event of a flat tire is therefore no longer
required.
To continue driving with a damaged tire,
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire, page 89
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-
sage with low tire inflation pressure,
page 91
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires on page 192.
If you have new tires mounted or switch from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa, use run-
flat tires because no spare tire is provided in
case of a flat. Your BMW center will be glad to
advise you.
Also refer to New wheels and tires, page 192.
The suitable tools for changing tires are
available as accessories from your BMW
center.<
Car jacking points
The jacking points for the car jack are located in
the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate.
Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all
matters concerning the battery.
Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. For the connections, refer
to Jump starting on page 207.
Disposal
After replacement, have old batteries dis-
posed of by your BMW center or deposit
them at a recycling center. Maintain the battery
in an upright position for transport and storage.
Always secure the battery to prevent it from tip-
ping over during transport.<
Power failure
Following a temporary interruption of the power
supply, the operation of some equipment is lim-
ited and must be reinitialized. Individual settings
are also lost and must be updated:
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The position must be stored again, refer to
page 49.
> Time and Date
The values must be updated, refer to
page 82.
> Radio
Stations must be stored again if necessary,
refer to page 150.
> Navigation system
Wait until the system starts, refer to
page 141.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse, and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to overloading of the wiring, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are
located in the compartment for the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 201.
Information on fuse allocation is located below
the bracket for the onboard tool kit, see below.
In glove compartment
1. Press the button on the back in the center of
partition 1 and pull out the partition upward,
arrow 2.
2. Press the coupling downward, arrow 3, and
fold the lid 4 forward.
In luggage compartment
Fold the cover under the floor mat upward and
remove the bracket for the onboard tool kit.
Information on fuse allocation 1 and additional
fuses 2 are provided there.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
206
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency call
Conditions for an emergency call:
> Complete preparation for mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency call is
still possible when no mobile phone is
logged on in the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 179.
> Radio readiness is activated.
> The car phone is logged on to a mobile
communications network.
> The emergency call system is operable.
When the contact of participation with
BMW Assist expires, the car phone can be
deactivated by a BMW center without having to
visit a workshop. Following deactivation of the
car phone, no emergency calls can be made.
The car phone can be reactivated after signing
a new contract with a BMW center.
Initiating an emergency call
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
With some vehicle equipment packages or
in the Convertible, the arrangement of the
switches and indicator lamps may differ
somewhat.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the
voice connection to the BMW Assist response
center has been established, the LED flashes.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
If the current location of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be forwarded to the
BMW Assist response center.
If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear
the BMW Assist response center through the
handsfree system, this could indicate, for
instance, that the handsfree system is no longer
operational. But the response center is still able
to hear you.
Under certain conditions, an emergency call is
automatically initiated immediately after a
severe accident. The automatic emergency call
is not affected by the button being pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency call
cannot be guaranteed under the most
unfavorable conditions.<
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side in the luggage compartment.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
First-aid kit*
The first-aid kit is located in the filler element of
the rear seat backrest.
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
2. Take out first-aid kit.
To refit the filler element, insert the two
bottom tabs into the strip and press the
filler element back into place. Make sure that
you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. For this reason, check
the expiration dates of each of the items regu-
larly and replace any whose expiration dates
have passed.
Roadside Assistance*
The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group
offers you assistance in the event of a break-
down around the clock, including on weekends
and public holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
BMW Contact directory.
With BMW Assist or TeleService, you can con-
tact the Roadside Assistance of the BMW
Group for assistance in the event of a break-
down directly via iDrive, refer to page 181.
Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Care-
fully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparing
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and com-
ponents in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of short circuiting.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol-
low this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
In your BMW, the so-called auxiliary terminal
for jump starting in the engine compartment
serves as a positive terminal for the battery, also
refer to engine compartment overview on
page 195. The cover cap is marked with a +.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
208
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jump-
starting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
starting-aid terminal of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a jump-
starting terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the vehicle
providing assistance.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative terminal.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using tow fitting
The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool kit
mounted on the inside of the luggage compart-
ment under the floor mat, refer to page 201, and
should always remain in the vehicle. It can be
screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
Only use the tow fitting that comes with
the vehicle and screw it in as far as possi-
ble. Use the tow fitting for towing only on roads.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do
not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise,
the tow fitting and vehicle can be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Rectangular cover panel in bumper:
Press the arrow symbol on the cover.
Front
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 58; otherwise, the low-beam
headlights, tail lights, turn signals and wind-
shield wipers would not be available. If the vehi-
cle electrical system fails, do not tow-start or
tow the vehicle. The electric steering-wheel
lock cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot
be steered. For information on jump starting,
refer to page 207. There is no power assistance
with the engine stopped. This then requires
increased effort for braking and steering. Active
steering is deactivated and larger steering
wheel movements are required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-
ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-
tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever position, refer to Deac-
tivating selector lever interlock page 63.
Do not exceed a towing speed of
45 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
Engage selector lever position N with the igni-
tion switched on.
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar-
ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed; otherwise, it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, please note the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be strictly limited during cornering.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach tow ropes to the tow fittings only, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
210
With tow truck
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but
instead start the engine by means of jump start-
ing, refer to page 207. With a catalytic con-
verter, tow-starting should only be carried out
with the engine cold, and with automatic trans-
missions, the engine cannot be started by tow-
starting.
If the electrical system fails, do not tow-
start or tow the vehicle, as otherwise the
electric steering-wheel lock cannot be
unlocked and the vehicle cannot be steered.<
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
3. Shift into 3rd gear. For information on SMG,
see below.
4. Tow-start with the clutch completely
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch again completely.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
1. Tow-start in selector-lever position N.
2. Select the sequential mode. The correct
gear will be selected and engaged automat-
ically.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice command
system and the index, which is the quickest way
to find the information you are looking for.
Reference
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technical data
214
Technical data
Engine specifications
650i
Displacement cu in/cmµ 292.8/4,799
No. of cylinders 8
Maximum output hp 360
at engine speed rpm 6,300
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 360/488
at engine speed rpm 3,400
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Technical data
216
Convertible: dimensions
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
217
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
650i Coupe 650i Convertible
Curb weight lbs./kg 3,814/1,730 4,277/1,940
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 4,652/2,110 5,049/2,290
Load lbs./kg 838/380 772/350
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,337/1,060 2,403/1,090
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,491/1,130 2,778/1,260
Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 15.9/450 10.6/300
> with raised convertible top
compartment floor, refer to page 35
cu ft/l – 12.4/350
Notes
Fuel tank gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel specification: page 187
including reserve of: gal/liters approx. 2.1/8
Window and headlamp
washer system US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5
For details: page 66
Engine oil and filter change US quarts/liters 8.5/8.0 BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil
Oil grades: page 196
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Short commands of voice command system
218
Short commands of voice command
system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice command system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
To open the assistance window 20 {Assistance window}
To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change scale in assistance window 138 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}
Function Command
To activate telephone 171 {Phone}
To dial phone number 171 {Dial number}
To display the phone book 171 {A to Z}
To dial from phone book 171 {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 172 {Top 8}
To redial 172 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 172 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 172 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 167 {Bluetooth}
To open BMW Assist 179 {BMW Assist}
To open "BMW Service" 181 {BMW Service}
To open "BMW Contact" 173 {BMW Contact}
To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 181 {BMW Contact numbers}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
219
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Navigation
Onboard info
Function Command
To open navigation 125 {Navigation}
To open "Enter address" 125 {Enter address}
To open "New destination" 125 {New destination}
To display "Input map" 129 {Input map}
To display destination list 131 {Destination list}
To display the address book 132 {Address book}
To display the route criteria 134 {Route preference}
To start destination guidance 136 {Start guidance}
To end destination guidance 136 {Stop guidance}
To display arrow display 137 {Arrow display}
To display map view 137 {Map},{Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To change scale 138 {Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display streets and towns/cities of the
route 138
{Route list}
To switch on voice instructions 139 {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions 139 {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions 139 {Repeat navigation info}
To open route 134, 138
{Route}
To display current position 140 {Current Position}
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 76 {Car data}
To display the computer 76 {Onboard info}
To display the trip computer 76 {Trip computer}
To set the speed limit 81 {Limit}
To start the stopwatch 81 {Stopwatch}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Short commands of voice command system
220
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 145 {Audio}
To switch on radio 148 {Radio on},
{FM on} or
{AM on}
To open "FM" 148 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 148 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 148 {FM All stations}
To select the radio station 148 {Station ...} or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 148 {FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To select stored radio stations 148 {Choose preset}
To open "Manual" 149 {FM manual},
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
To open the radio station with the best
reception 149
{AM Autostore}
To open "WB" 152 {Weatherband menu}
To switch on weatherband 152 {Weatherband on}
To select a weatherband station 152 {Choose weatherband station}
To open "SAT" 154 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 154
{SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of satellite radio 155 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of satellite radio 154 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of satellite radio 154 {SAT radio categories}
To select CD player 157 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 157 {CD}
To select CD changer 157 {CD-changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 157 {CD-changer}
To select a CD 157 {CD 1...6}
To select music track 158 {CD track ...}
To select CD and track 158 {CD 1...6 track ...}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
221
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Climate
menu
Function Command
To open "Vent settings" 106 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 105 {Automatic programs}
To open "Parked car ventilation" 108 {Parked car operation}
To open "Automatic ventilation" 108 {Automatic ventilation}
To display the activation times 108 {Activation time}
Function Command
To open "Door locks" 30, 32 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 54 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open "Lighting" 65, 100 {Lighting}
To open "Communication settings" 179 {Communication settings}
To open "BMW Service settings" 179 {BMW Service settings}
To open "BMW Service" 181 {BMW service}
To open "Service requirements" 77, 180 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 77, 180 {Service}
To display "Check Control messages" 79 {Check Control messages}
To open "Display settings" 82 {Display settings}
To open "Head-Up Display" 96 {Head-up display}
To activate speed limit 81 {Limit on}
To deactivate speed limit 81 {Limit off}
To adjust the brightness of the Control
Display 83
{Brightness}
To open "Units" 84 {Units}
To open "Languages" 84, 139 {Language}
To open "Time" 82 {Time}
To open "Date" 83 {Date}
To open "PDC" 85 {PDC}
To open "FTM" 88 {FTM}
To open "TPM" 90 {TPM}
To open "Entertainment settings" 145 {Entertainment settings}
To activate BMW Night Vision 98 {Night Vision on}
To deactivate BMW Night Vision 98 {Close Night Vision}
To display settings for BMW Night Vision 98 {Night Vision configuration}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
222
Everything from A to Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions, and
indicates where to find them
in the text.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 67
Acceleration assistant with
SMG 64
Accessories 6
Activated-charcoal filter 108
Activating hour signal 83
"Activation time" for parked
car ventilation 108
Active cruise control 67
– indicator lamp 70
– radar sensor 71
– selecting distance 69
– warning lamps 71
Active steering 92
– warning lamp 92
Adapter for spare key 28
Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 92
Adaptive Head Light 101
"Add digits" for mobile
phone 172
"Address book" for
navigation 132
Address for navigation
– deleting 133
– entering 125, 128
– selecting 133
– storing 132
– storing current position 132
"Add to address book" 132
"Add to destination list" 128
Adjusting confirmation signals
for locking and unlocking 31
Adjusting the thigh support 48
Adjusting tone in audio mode,
refer to Tone control 145
"After door opened" 50
"After unlocking" 50
Airbags 92
– deactivating, refer to
Exception for front
passenger seat 56
– sitting safely 47
– warning lamp 94
Air distribution
– automatic 105
– manual 106
Airing, refer to Ventilation 107
Air recirculation, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 107
"Air recirculation on / off" 54
Air vents, refer to
Ventilation 107
Air volume
106
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 187
Alarm system 35
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
– interior motion sensor 36
– switching off alarm 35
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 36
– tilt alarm sensor 36
"All channels" 154
"All doors" 30
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 193
"All stations" on the radio,
selecting 148, 151
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 6
"AM", reception
range 144, 148
Antenna for mobile phone 166
Antifreeze
– coolant 197
– washer fluid 66
Antilock Brake System
ABS 86
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 35
Anti-theft system, refer to
Central locking system 29
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 217
Approved engine oils 196
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 217
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 112
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Arrival time
– refer to Computer 76
– refer to Starting destination
guidance 136
"Arrow display" during
Navigation 137
Ashtray 113
Assist, refer to
BMW Assist 179
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 86
Assistance window 20
"Assist. window off" 21
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 107
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
223
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Audio 144
– controls 144
– switching on/off 144
– tone control 145
– volume 145
"Audio", refer to Tone
control 145
Automatic
– air distribution 105
– air volume 105
– headlamp control 100
– service notification 180
– steering wheel adjustment,
refer to Easy entry/exit 53
– storing stations 149
Automatically switching
between high beams and
low beams, refer to High-
beam assistant 102
Automatic car washes 120
– also refer to Comfort
access 38
– also refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Automatic climate control 104
– automatic air
distribution 105
– convertible program 105
– switching off 107
Automatic closing of doors,
see Automatic soft
closing 33
Automatic curb monitor 53
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 100
– refer to Daytime running
lamps 101
– refer to High-beam
assistant 102
– refer to Interior lamps 103
– refer to Pathway lighting 100
"Automatic programs" 105
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 107
Automatic soft closing 33
Automatic station search 149
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– deactivating selector lever
interlock 63
– Dynamic Driving Control 64
– interlock 62
– kick-down 63
– selector lever lock,
Interlock 62
– shiftlock 62
– towing 209
– tow-starting 210
– with comfort access 38
"Automatic ventilation" 108
AUTO program with
automatic climate
control 105
"Autostore" on the
radio 148, 150
Average fuel consumption 75
– setting units 84
Average speed 75
"Avoid ferries" for
navigation 135
"Avoid highways" for
navigation 135
Avoiding freeways for
navigation 134
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
"Avoid tollroads" for
navigation 135
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 217
"A - Z" 171, 172
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 48
Backrests, refer to Seats 48
Backup lamps
– refer to Reverse gear 61
– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 203
"Balance", refer to Tone
control 146
Balance, refer to Tone
control 146
Balance adjustment in audio
mode, right/left 146
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 207
Bass, refer to Tone
control 145
"Bass", tone control 146
Battery
– disposal 38
– jump starting 207
– refer to Vehicle battery 204
Battery change 38
Being towed 209
Belts, refer to Safety belts 51
Blower, refer to Air
volume 106
"BMW Assist" 181
BMW Assist 179
– enabling 179
– services offered 180
"BMW Contact" 173
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 173
BMW homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 199
BMW Night Vision 97
– activating 98
– cleaning camera 99
– cleaning camera, refer to
Wiper system 66
– deactivating 98
– making settings 98
"BMW Service" 181
"BMW Service settings" 180
BMW website 4
Brake Assistant, refer to DBC
Dynamic Brake Control 86
Brake fluid 197
– level 197
– warning lamp 197
Brake force display 92
Brake hydraulic system 197
Brake lamps
– brake force display 92
– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 203
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
224
Brake pads 198
– breaking-in 118
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
– brake fluid 197
– brake force display 92
– brake pads 198
– breaking-in 118
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 86
– handbrake 60
Brake system 118
– brake fluid level 197
– brake pads 118, 198
– brake rotors 120
– breaking-in 118
– warning lamp 13, 197
Brake wear warning
– brake pads 198
– warning lamp 198
Braking
– electronic brake-force
distribution 86
– refer to Braking safely 119
Braking safely 119
Breakdown assistance 181
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 207
Breaking-in 118
Breaking-in the clutch 118
Breaking-in the
differential 118
"Brightness" 83, 96
– with BMW Night Vision 99
Brightness of Control
Display 83
Button for starting engine 58
Buttons on steering wheel 11
Bypassing route sections 140
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
"Call" 172
Call
– accepting 170
– displaying accepted 172
– ending 171
– in absence 172
– starting 171
Calling
– from phone book 171
– from Top 8 list 172
– redialing 172
Capacity of luggage
compartment 217
Car care, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
"Car Data" 76
Care 200
– refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 121
– stowing cargo 121
– vehicle 120
Caring for artificial leather,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for light-alloy wheels,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for plastic, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to
the Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 28
Car phone 166
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 112
– refer to Mobile phone 166
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Car radio, refer to Radio 148
Car wash 120
– refer to Before driving into a
car wash 120
– refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– with comfort access 38
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 118
"Categories" 155
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 86
CBS Condition Based
Service 199
"CD" 144, 157
CD changer 157
– controls 144
– fast forward/reverse 161
– installation location
161
– playing a track 159
– random play sequence 160
– repeating a track 160
– selecting a CD 157
– selecting a track 158
– switching on/off 144
– tone control 145
– volume 145
CD player 157
– controls 144
– fast forward/reverse 161
– playing a track 159
– random play sequence 160
– repeating a track 160
– selecting a track 158
– switching on/off 144
– tone control 145
– volume 145
Center armrest, adjusting
height 112
Center console 14
"Central locking" 30
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
225
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Central locking system 29
– comfort access 36
– from inside vehicle 32
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 6
Changing a wheel 204
Changing language on
Control Display 84
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 84
Changing wheels 192
CHECK button 80
Check Control 79
"Check Control
messages" 80
Check Gas Cap 186
Checking air pressure, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 188
Children's seats, refer to Child
restraint systems 56
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 57
Child restraint systems 56
Chrome parts, care, refer to
the Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Cigarette lighter 113
Cigarette lighter socket, refer
to Connecting electrical
devices 114
Cleaning, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
"Climate" 105
Clock 74
– 12h/24h mode 83
– setting time and date 82
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Closing fuel filler cap 186
Clothes hooks, Coupe 113
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 59
Comfort access 36
– observe in car wash 38
– replacing battery 38
Comfort closing
– windows, with comfort
access with Coupe 37
– with comfort access 37
"Communication" 170, 181
"Communication
settings" 180
Compact disc
– refer to CD changer 157
– refer to CD player 157
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 58
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 112
Compressed audio files 157
Computer 75
– displays on Control
Display 76
– hour signal 83
"Concert hall", refer to Tone
control 146
Condition Based Service
CBS 199
"Confirmation" 31
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 114
Consumption display, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 75
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 75
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 136
"Contrast" with BMW Night
Vision 99
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 83
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Convenience operation
– convertible top 31, 32
– glass sunroof 31, 32
– windows 31, 32
Convertible
– convertible program for
automatic climate
control 105
– opening and closing
windows 38
– rollover protection
system 94
– top 42
– wind deflector 45
– window and convertible top
operation with comfort
access 37
Convertible top
– care, refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– convenience operation 32
– emergency closing 43
– manual closing 43
– opening and closing 42
Coolant 197
– checking level 197
– temperature 74
Cooling, maximum 107
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 86
Country of destination for
navigation 126
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 103
Cruise control 66, 67
– active cruise control 67
Cruising range 75
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 217
"Current position" 140
Current position
– displaying 140
– entering 132
– storing 132
"Curve mode" with
BMW Night Vision 99
"Customer
Relations" 173, 182
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 214
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
226
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Data
– capacities 217
– dimensions 215
– engine 214
– technical data 214
– weights 217
"Date" 83
Date 74
– setting 83
"Date format" 83
Daytime running lamps 101
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 86
"Deactivated" 50
Deactivating selector lever
interlock 63
Decommissioning the vehicle
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Defrosting windows 106
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 106
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 106
"Delete address book" for
navigation 134
"Delete all numbers" on the
mobile phone 173
"Delete data" for
navigation 134
"Delete" for mobile
phone 173
Destination address
– deleting 133
– entering 125, 128
Destination for navigation
– destination list 131
– entering via voice 128
– entry 125
– home address 134
– selecting from address
book 133
– selecting using
information 130
– storing 132
Destination guidance 136
– bypassing route
sections 140
– canceling voice
instructions 55
– changing specified
route 134
– displaying routes 137
– distance and arrival 136
– interrupting 136
– starting 136
– terminating/continuing 136
– voice instructions 139
– volume of voice
instructions 139
Destination list for
navigation 131
Destinations recently driven
to 131
"Details" in audio mode 159
"Dial" for mobile phone 171
"Dial number" 171
"Diamond button" 54
Digital clock 74
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 152
Dimensions
– Convertible 216
– Coupe 215
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 139
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 139
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 132
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 214
"Display" 83
Display, refer to iDrive 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 103
"Display off" 21
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
"Display settings" 82
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up Display 95
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 38
– vehicle battery 204
Distance, refer to
Computer 76
Distance control, refer to
Active cruise control 67
"Distance to dest." 76
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 76
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 85
Door entry lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 103
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Door lock 32
"Door locks" 30
Doors
– manual operation 32
– remote control 31
DOT Quality Grades 190
Draft-free ventilation
108
"Driver's door only" 30
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 100
Driving notes 118
Driving route, refer to
Displaying the route 137
Driving stability control
systems 86
Driving through water 119
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 118
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
227
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 106
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
– indicator lamp 13, 87
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 87
– activating 87
– indicator lamp 13, 87
DVD for navigation 124
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 86
Dynamic Drive 87
Dynamic Driving Control 64
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 87
E
Easy entry, refer to Entering
rear 51
Easy entry/exit 53
EBV, refer to Electronic brake-
force distribution 86
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on CD player 144
Electrical malfunction
– convertible top 43
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 186
– glass sunroof 41
– luggage compartment lid 34
– storage compartment, hotel
function 33
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 53
Electronic brake-force
distribution 86
Electronic oil level check 195
Emergency assistance, refer
to Roadside Assistance 207
Emergency call 206
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– convertible top 43
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 186
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
– selector lever interlock,
automatic transmission 63
Emergency release for
luggage compartment lid in
luggage compartment 35
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 207
"Emission inspect." 78
"Enable services" 180
"End call" 171
"End Night Vision" 99
Engine
– breaking-in 118
– data 214
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 74
– speed 214
– starting 59
– starting, comfort access 36
– starting difficulties 59
– switching off 60
– switching off when equipped
with Automatic trans-
mission, with comfort
access 38
Engine compartment 195
Engine coolant 197
Engine oil
– additives
196
– approved oils 196
– electronic oil level check 195
– recommended oils 196
– temperature 75
– temperature gauge 75
– topping off 196
"Engine oil level" 196
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 214
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
Engine speed, refer to Engine
specifications 214
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 59
"Enter address" 126, 132
Entering address 125, 128
Entering destination via town/
city name 126
Entering intersection 127
Entering rear 51
Entering town/city for
navigation 126
Entering zip code for
navigation 127
"Entertainment" 144
"Entertainment
settings" 145, 152
Entertainment sound output
on/off 145
Entry map for destination 129
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 147
"Equalizer", tone control 147
"ESN" 154
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Event data recorders 200
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 118
Exterior mirrors 52
– automatic dimming
feature 53
– automatic heating 53
– folding in and out 52
– tilting down passenger-side
mirror 53
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 208
Eyes for lashing, refer to
Securing cargo 121
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
228
F
"Fader", refer to Tone
control 146
Fader, refer to Tone
control 146
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 79
False alarms, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 36
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 51
Fastest route for
navigation 134
Fast forward
– CD changer 161
– CD player 161
"Fast route" for
navigation 135
"Favorites" calling up with
radio 151
Filling capacities 217
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 207
First-aid kit 207
Flashing when locking and
unlocking, refer to Setting
acknowledgment signals 31
Flashlight, refer to
Rechargeable flashlight 111
Flat tire
– Flat Tire Monitor 88
– run-flat tires 89, 91, 192
– Tire Pressure Monitor 89
Flat Tire Monitor 88
– false alarms 88
– initializing system 88
– limits of system 88
– show chains 193
– warning lamp 89
"FM", reception
range 144, 148
FM, waveband 148
Fog lamps 103
– indicator lamp 13, 103
Folding into raised position
convertible top
compartment floor,
Convertible 35
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 119
Footwell lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 103
For specified oil grades, refer
to Approved engine oils 196
For your own safety 6
Freeway, refer to Route
criteria 134
Front airbags 92
Front passenger airbags
deactivating
93
"FTM" 89
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 88
Fuel
– average consumption 75
– display 75
– fuel specifications 187
– high-quality brands 187
– quality 187
– specifications 187
– tank capacity 186
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Fuel filler door 186
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 186
Fuel gauge 75
"Full screen" with BMW Night
Vision 99
Fuses 205
G
Garage-door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 110
Gasoline
– refer to Average fuel
consumption 75
– refer to Fuel
specifications 187
– refer to Required fuel 187
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Gear changes
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Gear display
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– manual transmission 60
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
General driving notes 118
Glass sunroof, electric with
raise function 40
– comfort operation with
comfort access 37
– convenience operation 32
– moving manually 41
– remote control 31
Glove compartment 111
– rechargeable flashlight 111
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 124
Grills, refer to Ventilation 107
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 217
H
Handbrake 60
– indicator lamp 13, 60
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hazard warning flashers 15
HD, refer to High Definition
Radio 152
Head airbags 92
Headlamp control,
automatic 100
Headlamp flasher 64
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
229
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Headlamps
– care, refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– replacing bulbs 201
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 101
Head restraints
– front 50
– removing 50
– sitting safely 47
"Head-Up Display" 96
Head-Up Display 95
Heated
– mirrors, refer to Automatic
functions 53
– rear window 106
– seats 52
– steering wheel 54
Heater 105
Heating
– exterior mirrors 53
– interior 104
– rear window 106
– residual heat 107
– seats 52
– steering wheel 54
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 107
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 121
Height, refer to
Dimensions 215
Height adjustment
– seats 48
– steering wheel 53
High-beam assistant 102
High beams 101
– headlamp flasher 101
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 202
High Definition Radio 152
High water, refer to Driving
through water 119
Hills 119
"Home address" in
navigation 134
Homepage 4
Hood 194
Horn 10
Hotel function 33
– unlocking manually 33
Hot exhaust system 118
"Hour memo" 83
"House number" for desti-
nation entry 128
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 86
Hydroplaning 119
– also refer to Minimum tread
depth 191
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 152
Ice, refer to Outside temper-
ature warning 74
ID3-Tag, refer to Information
about track 159
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 83
– assistance window 20
– changing date and time 82
– changing language 84
– changing menu page 19
– changing settings 82
– changing unit of measure
units and display form 84
– controller 16
– controls 16
– displaying menus 17
– selecting menu item 19
– selecting or confirming
entry 19
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– symbols 18
Ignition 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 58
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 58
Ignition lock 58
– starting engine with comfort
access 37
Indicator/warning lamps
– active steering 92
– airbags 94
– DSC 13, 87
– DTC 13, 87
– Flat Tire Monitor 89
– fog lamps 13, 103
– handbrake 13, 60
– safety belt warning 52
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
Indicator and warning lamps,
overview 13
Individually programmable
buttons on steering
wheel 54
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 188
Inflation pressure monitoring
– refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
– refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 89
Information
– on another location 130
– on current position 130
– on destination location 130
"Information" for
navigation 130
"Information on
destination" 132
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 88
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 150
– refer to Power failure 204
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 49
– time and date 82
"Input map" 130
Installation location
– CD changer 161
– navigation drive 124
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
230
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 139
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 103
Instrument lighting 103
Instrument panel, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 110
Interesting destination for
navigation 130
"Interim time" 82
Interior lamps 103
– switching on with remote
control 31
Interior motion sensor 36
– switching off 36
Interior rearview mirror 53
– automatically dimming, refer
to Automatic functions 53
Interlock on automatic
transmission 62
Intermittent wiper mode 65
J
Jacking points 204
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jump starting 207
K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 36
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 29
"Keypad" 174
Keys 28
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Kick-down
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Knock control 187
L
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 100
Lamps and bulbs 201
"Languages" 84
– for navigation 139
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 121
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 131
"Last seat pos." 49
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 57
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 201
Length, refer to
Dimensions 215
License plate lamps, replacing
bulbs 204
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 201
Lighter 113
"Lighting" 65, 101
Lighting
– instruments 103
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 100
– refer to High-beam
assistant 102
Light switch 100
"Limit" 81
Loading, refer to Cargo
loading 120
"Lock after driving" 32
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 33
Locking
– from inside 33
– from outside 31
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 36
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Locking out, refer to
Unlocking 37
Locking without key, refer to
Comfort access 36
Low beams 100
– automatic 100
– replacing bulbs 201
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 48
Luggage compartment
– capacity 217
– emergency release 35
– hotel function 33
– increasing capacity,
Convertible 35
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment
lid 34
– opening from inside 34
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31
Luggage compartment lid 34
– emergency operation 34
– emergency release 35
– opening from inside 34
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31, 34
– unlocking manually 34
Lumbar support 48
LW, waveband 148
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 193
Maintenance
– refer to Service
requirements 77
– refer to the Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 199
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 199
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
231
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Maintenance system 199
Malfunction
– convertible top 43
– door lock 32
– fuel filler door 186
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 79
Manual air distribution 106
Manual mode with automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 63
"Manual" on the radio 149
Manual operation
– convertible top 43
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 186
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
– selector lever interlock,
Automatic transmission 63
Manual transmission 60
"Map direction of travel" 138
"Map facing north" 138
Map for navigation
– changing scale 138
– destination entry 129
Map view 137
Map view facing north 137
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Maximum cooling 107
Maximum speed with winter
tires 193
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 49
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Microfilter 108
Microphone
– for mobile phone 14
– for voice command
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 53
Mirrors 52
– automatic curb monitor 53
– heating 53
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 49
"Missed calls" 172
Missed calls 172
Mobile communications
devices in vehicle 119
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 172
– adjusting volume
170
– calling 171
– ending call 171
– missed calls 172
– operation via iDrive 170
– redialing 172
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– Top 8 172
– touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 174
Mobile phones, use in vehicle,
refer to Mobile communica-
tions devices in vehicle 119
Mobile Service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 207
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring pressure of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
"Monitor on / off" 54
Most recent mobile phone
numbers 172
MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 157
Multi-function steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 64
– refer to Wiper/washer
system 65
"Mute on / off" 54
MW, waveband 148
N
"Navigation" 76, 125
Navigation destination
– manual entry 125
– selecting via map 129
Navigation drive, installation
location 124
Navigation DVD 124
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice instruc-
tions on/off 139
Navigation system 124
– address book 132
– bypassing route
sections 140
– destination entry 125
– destination guidance in
assistance window 124
– destination list 131
– displaying current
position 140
– entering a destination
manually 125
– entering destination via
voice 128
– last destinations 131
– looking for interesting
destination 130
– route display 137
– route list 138
– selecting destination using
information 130
– selecting destination via
map 129
– selecting route criteria 134
– starting 125
– starting destination
guidance 136
– switching off, refer to Termi-
nating/continuing desti-
nation guidance 136
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 136
– voice instructions 139
– volume adjustment 139
"Navigation voice
instructions" 54
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
232
"Navigation voice instructions
on" 139
Neck support, refer to Front
head restraints 50
"New address" for
navigation 132
"New destination" 125, 129
New remote control 28
"New route" 140
New wheels and tires 192
"Next entertainment
source" 54
Night Vision, refer to
BMW Night Vision 97
Night vision device, refer to
BMW Night Vision 97
"Night Vision on / off" 54
Nozzles
– refer to Ventilation 107
– refer to Windshield washer
nozzles 66
Nylon rope, refer to Tow-
starting and towing 208
O
OBD Socket 200
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 187
Odometer 74
Oil
– additives 196
– approved engine oils 196
– capacity 217
– consumption 195
– consumption, refer to
Engine oil, checking 195
– level 195
– topping off 196
Oil change intervals
– refer to Service
requirements 77
– refer to the Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or to
the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
"On a new destination" for
navigation 131
"Onboard info" 76
Onboard monitor, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard tool kit 201
"On destination" 131
"On location" 131
Opening and closing
– comfort access 36
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– using door lock 32
– using the remote control 30
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 174
– adjusting volume 175
– canceling 175
– commands 175
– correcting phone
number 176
– dialing phone number 176
– placing a call 176
– redialing 177
– voice phone book 176
"Options" 182
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 214
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 107
Outside temperature
display 74
– changing unit of measure 84
P
Panic mode 31
Park Distance Control PDC 85
"Parked car operation" 108
"Parked car ventilation" 108
Parked car ventilation
– activating an activation
time 109
– setting activation time 108
– switching on and off
directly 108
Parking, vehicle 60
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 85
Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 85
Parking brake, refer to
Handbrake 60
Parking lamps 100
– replacing bulbs 202
Parts and accessories 6
Passenger airbags, deacti-
vating, refer to Exception for
front passenger seat 56
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 53
"Pathway lighting" 101
Pathway lighting 100
"PDC" 86
"PDC display on" 86
PDC Park Distance Control 85
Personal Profile 29
"Perspective" 138
"Phone" 171
Phone book 170
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 173
– dialing 171
– most recent numbers 172
– selecting in phone book 172
– Top 8 172
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof 40
– power windows 40
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 207
"Play"
– in audio mode 158
– on the radio, selecting 155
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 58
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 108
Position
– displaying 140
– storing 132
Power failure 204
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
233
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Power windows, refer to
Windows 38
"Presets" on the
radio 148, 154
Presetting parked car venti-
lation activation times 108
Pressure, tires 188
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 89
"Profile" 183
Programmable buttons on
steering wheel 54
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof 40
– windows 40
R
Radio
– Autostore 149
– controls 144
– High Definition Radio 152
– playing stations 149
– satellite radio 153
– selecting frequency
manually 149
– selecting
waveband 144, 148
– station search 149
– station selection 148
– station with best
reception 149
– storing stations 150
– switching on/off 144
– tone control 145
– volume 145
– Weather Band, refer to
Weather news flashes 151
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 58
Radio readiness 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
– with comfort access 37
Rain sensor, windshield
washer system 65
"Random", random play
sequence, selecting 160
"Random all" in audio
mode 160
"Random directory" in audio
mode 160
Random play sequence
– CD changer 160
– CD player 160
"RDS" 151
Reading lamps 103
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 203
Rearview mirrors, refer to
Mirrors 52
Rear window
– heating 106
– opening and closing 39
"Received calls" 172
Reception
– quality 151
– radio stations 151
– regional station 149
Reception quality of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Rechargeable flashlight 111
Recirculated-air mode, refer
to AUC Automatic recircu-
lated-air control
107
Recirculation of air, refer to
AUC Automatic recircu-
lated-air control 107
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 48
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 81
"Redial" for mobile phone 171
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 203
Refueling 186
Releasing, hood 194
"Relock door if not
opened" 32
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 75
Remaining distance to desti-
nation, refer to Computer 76
Remote control 28
– battery replacement 38
– comfort access 36
– garage-door opener 110
– luggage compartment lid 31
– malfunction 31, 38
Removing condensation from
windows 106
"Repeat directory" in audio
mode 160
"Repeat" in audio mode 160
"Repeat track" in audio
mode 160
Replacement fuses 205
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 201
Replacing tires
– changing a wheel 204
– new wheels and tires 192
Reporting an accident, refer to
Initiating emergency
call 206
Reporting safety defects 7
Required fuel 187
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Reservoir for washer
systems 66
"Reset" 90
– for stopwatch 81
– tone settings 147
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 147
Residual heat 107
Restraint systems
– for children 56
– refer to Safety belts 51
Retreaded tires 192
Reverse, fast
– CD changer 161
– CD player 161
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic
63
– manual transmission 61
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
234
Road map 137
"Roadside
Assistance" 173, 181
Roadside Assistance 207
Roadside parking lamps 101
– replacing bulbs, refer to
Parking lamps 202
Rollover protection system on
Convertible 94
– lowering 94
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 208
Rotary fuel controller, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 134
– bypassing sections 140
– changing 134, 140
– display 137
– displaying arrow display 137
– displaying map 137
– displaying towns/cities and
streets 138
– list 138
– selecting 134
– selecting criteria 134
Route map, refer to Map
view 137
"Route preference",
changing 134
Route selection 134
Run-flat tires 192
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 89, 91
– flat tire 89, 91
– tire inflation pressure 188
– tire replacement 192, 193
– winter tires 193
S
Safety belts 51
– damage 52
– indicator lamp 52
– sitting safely 47
Safety belt tensioners, refer to
Safety belts 51
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
– airbags 92
– DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 94
– safety belts 51
Satellite radio 153
– enabling channels 154
– selecting channel 154
– storing channel 154
"SAT" on the radio 144, 154
"Save current
destination" 134
"Scan"
– playing a music track 159
– playing stations 149
Scan
– CD changer 159
– CD player 159
– radio 149
"Scan all" in audio mode 159
"Scan directory" in audio
mode 159
Screw thread for tow
fitting 208
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 153
Seats 48
– adjusting 48
– heating 52
– lumbar support 48
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 49
– sitting safely 47
– sports seat 48
– storing the setting 49
– thigh support 48
Securing cargo 121
– ski bag 115
"Select as destination" 131
"Select current speed" 81
Selecting audio sources, refer
to Operating via iDrive 144
Selecting distance for active
cruise control 69
Selecting frequency
manually 149
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting new scale for
navigation system
display 138
Selecting route 134
Selection options with
navigation system 134
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– manual transmission 60
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Selector lever interlock, refer
to Shiftlock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Sequential Manual Trans-
mission SMG 61
"Service" 77, 180, 195
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 207
Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US
models 199
Service interval display, refer
to Service requirements 77
"Service notification" 181
"Service Request" 173, 182
"Service
requirements" 78, 180, 196
Service requirements 77
– also refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 199
"Service Status" 180
"Set"
– in audio mode 144
– in trip computer 77
"Set date" 83
"Set service date" 78
"Set time" 82
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
235
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Settings
– BMW Night Vision 98
– changing on Control
Display 82
– clock, 12h/24h mode 83
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Setting speed limit 81
Setting time, refer to Prese-
lecting activation time 108
"Set tire pressure" 89
Shifting
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Shifting paddles 62
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Short commands of voice
command system 218
"Short route" for
navigation 135
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 134
"Show current position" 130
"Show destination
position" 130
Side airbags 92
Side markers, replacing
bulbs 203
Side turn signals, replacing
bulbs 203
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sill panel lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 103
Sitting safely 47
– with airbags 47
– with head restraints 47
– with safety belts 47
Ski bag 114
Sliding/tilt roof, refer to Glass
sunroof, electric with raise
function 40
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting assistant 119
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
– acceleration assistant 64
– breaking-in 118
– Dynamic Driving Control 64
– gear display 61
– kick-down 62
– shiftlock 61
– towing 209
– tow-starting 210
Snow chains 193
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical devices
114
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 200
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 58
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 33
Song search with CD, refer to
Playing a track 159
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency call 206
Spare fuses 205
Spare key 28
– adapter 28
Spare remote control 28
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 196
Speed-dependent
volume 146
Speed limit 81
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 81
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", tone
control 146
Speed with winter tires 193
Sport program
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– refer to Dynamic Driving
Control 64
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 86
"Star button" 54
Start/Stop button 58
"Start" for stopwatch 81
"Start guidance" 128, 136
Starting assistant 119
Starting difficulties
– jump starting 207
– refer to Special starting
conditions 59
Starting engine 59
Starting off on slopes, refer to
Starting assistant 119
Start menu, iDrive 17
"Start route guidance" 130
"Start service" 181
"State / Province" for desti-
nation entry 126
"State inspection" 78
Station, refer to Radio 148
"Status" 78
Status information on Control
Display 20
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steering wheel
– adjustment 53
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Easy entry/exit
53
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 54
– lock 58
– locking 58
– memory 49
– programmable buttons 54
"Steering wheel buttons" 54
Steering-wheel shift buttons,
refer to Shift paddles 62
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 92
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 62
"Stop" for stopwatch 82
"Stopwatch" 81
Stopwatch 81
Storage compartments 112
"Store in address book" for
navigation 132
"Store" on the radio 150, 155
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
236
Storing current position 132
Storing radio stations 150
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 49
Storing tires 193
Straps, refer to Loading 121
"Street" for destination
entry 127
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 188
"Surround Settings", adjust
the sound 146
SW, waveband 148
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching between high
beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to High-
beam assistant 102
Switching off tilt alarm
sensor 36
Switching on
– audio 144
– CD changer 144
– CD player 144
– radio 144
Switching the cooling function
on and off 106
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 101
Symbols 4
– indicator and warning
lamps 13
T
Tachometer 74
Tail lamps 203
– replacing bulbs 203
Tank capacity
– also refer to Filling
capacities 217
– fuel tank capacity 186
Target cursor for
navigation 130
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 6
Technical data 214
Telematic, refer to
TeleService,
BMW Assist 179
Telephone, refer to Mobile
phone 166
Telephone, refer to separate
operating instructions
"Telephone list" 54
TeleService 179
– enabling 179
– services offered 180
Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 106
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 105
– of coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 74
Temperature display
– changing units of
measure 84
– outside temperature 74
– temperature warning 74
Temperature gauge, engine
oil 75
Temperature warning 74
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 66
"Terminate services" 182
"Text language" 84
"Theater", refer to Tone
control 146
The individual vehicle 5
Tie-down points, refer to
Securing cargo 121
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 53
"Time" 82
"Time format" 83
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation time 108
"Timer 1" for parked car
ventilation 109
"Timer 2" for parked car
ventilation 109
Tire inflation pressures 188
Tire pressure loss 89, 90
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 89
Tire Quality Grading 190
Tires
– age 190
– air loss 89, 91
– breaking-in 118
– condition 191
– damage 191
– inflation pressure 188
– minimum tread depth 191
– monitoring inflation
pressure, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 88
– new wheels and tires 192
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor 89
– replacing 192
– retreaded tires 192
– run-flat tires 192
– size 189
– size, refer to The right
wheels and tires 192
– wear indicators 191
– wheel/tire combination 192
– winter tires 193
Tires with run-flat properties,
refer to Run-flat tires 192
"Tone" 145
Tone dialing method 174
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 145
– middle setting 147
Tone on locking/unlocking 31
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 201
Top 42
"Top 8" for mobile phone 171
Torque, refer to Engine
specifications 214
Touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 174
Tow fitting 208
Towing 208
– tow fitting 208
"Town / City" for destination
entry 126
Tow-starting 208, 210
"TPM" 90
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Reference
237
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 89
– resetting system 90
– system limits 90
– warning lamp 91
Tracks
– finding 159
– random play sequence 160
– sample, Scan 159
Track width, refer to
Dimensions 215
Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Traffic congestion, refer to
Bypassing route
sections 140
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– deactivating selector lever
interlock on automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 63
– manual transmission 60
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
– starting assistant 119
Transporting children
safely 56
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 121
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tread depth 191
Treble, refer to Tone
control 145
"Treble", tone control 146
"Trip computer" 77
Trip computer 76
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 74
"Triple turn signal
activation" 65
Trip odometer 74
Trunk, refer to Luggage
compartment 35
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 34
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 215
Turn signals 64
– replacing bulbs 202
U
Undercarriage protection,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 190
"Units" 84
Units
– average fuel
consumption 84
– temperature 84
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 110
Universal remote control, refer
to Integrated universal
remote control 110
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– from outside 30
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 36
Unlocking and locking doors,
setting confirmation
signals 31
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 36
"Update services" 182
"Use current location as
address" 133, 134
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 204
– refer to Replacing battery 38
V
Vehicle
– breaking-in 118
– care, refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– cargo loading 120
– dimensions 215
– parking 60
– washing, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
– weights 217
Vehicle battery 204
Vehicle jack 204
– jacking points 204
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 140
"Vehicle settings" when
unlocking 30
Ventilation 107
– draft-free 108
– for cooling 108
– parked car ventilation 108
Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 104
"Vent settings" 106
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance with voice
instructions 139
Voice command system 22
– short commands 218
Voice instructions for
navigation system 139
– muting 55
– repeating 55, 139
– switching on/off 55, 139
– volume 139
Voice phone book 176
Volume 144
– audio sources 144
– mobile phone 170
– setting speed-
dependent 146
– voice instructions 139
Volume adjustment in audio
mode, front-to-rear 146
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
238
W
Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 79
Warning triangle 206
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 199
Washer fluid
– capacity of the reservoir 66
– wiper system 66
Washer fluid reservoir 66
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 119
Waveband for radio 148
"WB" 144, 152
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 191
Weather news flashes 151
Website 4
Weights 217
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 192
Wheel/tire damage 191
Wheel/tire replacement, refer
to New wheels and tires 192
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 215
Wheels and tires 188
Width, refer to
Dimensions 215
Wind deflector 45
Windows 38
– comfort closing with comfort
access 37
– convenience
operation 31, 32
– opening and closing,
Convertible 38
– opening and closing,
Coupe 38
– rear window, Convertible 39
Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 106
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 95
Windshield washer nozzles 66
Windshield washer system,
refer to Washer/wiper
system 65
Windshield wiper blade
replacement 201
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper/washer system 65
Winter tires 193
– setting speed limit 81
– storage
193
Wiper blade replacement 201
Wiper system 65
– rain sensor 65
– washer fluid 66
– windshield washer
nozzles 66
"With highways" for
navigation 135
Word matching principle for
navigation 135
Working in the engine
compartment 194
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard tool kit 201
X
Xenon lamps 201
– replacing bulbs 201
Z
"Zoom" with BMW Night
Vision 99
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
Refueling
To ensure that you always have all the essential
data on hand when refueling, we recommend
that you fill in the following tables with the spec-
ifications and information that apply to your
vehicle. Consult the index for individual specifi-
cations.
Fuel
Engine oil
Tire inflation pressures
Designation
Please enter your preferred fuel here.
Quality
Summer tires
Front Rear
Winter tires
Front Rear
Up to 2 persons
4 persons or 4 persons plus luggage
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
01 41 0 012 109 ue
*BL001210900H*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
6 US-En
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 109 - © 02/06 BMW AG
